Honeywell RFTerm User`s Guide

RFTerm™
User’s Guide
Disclaimer
Honeywell International Inc. (“HII”) reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this
document without prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult HII to determine whether any such changes have been
made. The information in this publication does not represent a commitment on the part of HII.
HII shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein; nor for incidental or consequential damages
resulting from the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
HII disclaims all responsibility for the selection and use of software and/or hardware to achieve intended results.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document
may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without the prior written consent of HII.
© 2002-2016 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
Web Address: www.honeywellaidc.com
Trademarks
RFTerm is a trademark or registered trademark of EMS Technologies, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft® Windows®, ActiveSync®, Windows XP®, MSN, Outlook®, Windows Mobile®, the Windows logo, and Windows Media
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Wi-Fi®, WMM®, Wi-Fi Mutlimedia™, Wi-Fi Protected Access®, WPA™, WPA2™ and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.2014
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Freefloat, Link*One, is a trademark of Freefloat, Mölndalsvägen 30B, SE-412 63Gothenburg, Sweden.
Wavelink®, the Wavelink logo and tagline, Wavelink Studio™, Avalanche Management Console™, Mobile Manager™, and
Mobile Manager Enterprise™ are trademarks of Wavelink Corporation, Kirkland.
Other product names or marks mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies
and are the property of their respective owners.
Patents
For patent information, please refer to www.hsmpats.com.
Front Cvr - 2
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Overview
Assumptions ........................................................................................................................1-1
Conventions Used in this Guide...........................................................................................1-1
Supported Devices...............................................................................................................1-1
About RFTerm .....................................................................................................................1-2
Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................1-2
SSH Protocol..................................................................................................................1-2
Multiple Host Sessions...................................................................................................1-3
Swapping Between Sessions.........................................................................................1-3
HotSpots ........................................................................................................................1-3
Screen Panning..............................................................................................................1-3
Configurable KeyBar ......................................................................................................1-3
SmartPads .....................................................................................................................1-3
Access Control ...............................................................................................................1-3
Device Lockdown ...........................................................................................................1-3
Configurable Fonts.........................................................................................................1-3
Color Schemes...............................................................................................................1-3
Automatic Login .............................................................................................................1-4
Automatic Session Persistence......................................................................................1-4
Dynamic Cursor View Modes.........................................................................................1-4
Text InputTool ................................................................................................................1-4
Device / LU Name Support ............................................................................................1-4
Automatic Re-connection ...............................................................................................1-4
Full VT220 Support ........................................................................................................1-4
VT Line Mode.................................................................................................................1-4
VT Answerback String....................................................................................................1-4
HotKeys..........................................................................................................................1-4
Block Mode ....................................................................................................................1-4
Programmable Function Keys........................................................................................1-4
Printing ...........................................................................................................................1-5
Help................................................................................................................................1-5
Double Byte Support ......................................................................................................1-5
Installation............................................................................................................................1-5
Installation Note .............................................................................................................1-5
Initial Installation (Windows CE, Windows Embedded Compact, or Windows Mobile)..1-5
Installation (All Other Windows Operating Systems) .....................................................1-5
Quick Start ...........................................................................................................................1-6
RFTerm Screen Sizes....................................................................................................1-7
Important Notes ...................................................................................................................1-8
Quick Tips ......................................................................................................................1-9
Chapter 2 - RFTerm Settings
Display .................................................................................................................................2-1
Parameters.....................................................................................................................2-1
Shortcuts ..............................................................................................................................2-3
i
Parameters .................................................................................................................... 2-3
Options1 .............................................................................................................................. 2-6
Parameters .................................................................................................................... 2-6
Options2 ............................................................................................................................ 2-10
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 2-10
Options3 ............................................................................................................................ 2-12
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 2-12
Sounds .............................................................................................................................. 2-14
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 2-14
Sound Events .............................................................................................................. 2-16
Status ................................................................................................................................ 2-17
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 2-17
Com1 and Com2 ............................................................................................................... 2-20
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 2-20
Stored Forms..................................................................................................................... 2-21
Creating Stored Forms ................................................................................................ 2-21
Chapter 3 - Session Configuration
Connection .......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Prerequisites for Connection ......................................................................................... 3-2
Parameters .................................................................................................................... 3-2
VT Configuration............................................................................................................ 3-4
5250 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 3-12
3270 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 3-17
Font ................................................................................................................................... 3-21
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-21
Colors ................................................................................................................................ 3-22
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-22
Barcode ............................................................................................................................. 3-24
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-24
Cursor................................................................................................................................ 3-28
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-28
Print Data Map................................................................................................................... 3-30
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-30
Auto Login ......................................................................................................................... 3-32
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-32
Fn Keys (Function Key Programming) .............................................................................. 3-34
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-34
Keybd ................................................................................................................................ 3-35
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-35
Compatibility ...................................................................................................................... 3-37
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-37
SSH ................................................................................................................................... 3-39
Parameters .................................................................................................................. 3-39
Chapter 4 - Session Interaction
Multiple Sessions................................................................................................................. 4-1
ii
MenuBar Session Menu ................................................................................................ 4-1
Session Host Menu........................................................................................................ 4-1
HotKey Session Selection ............................................................................................. 4-2
ToolBar Session Selection............................................................................................. 4-2
Password Protection............................................................................................................ 4-3
Connecting / Disconnecting from Host ................................................................................ 4-3
Device Name In Use...................................................................................................... 4-4
SmartPads........................................................................................................................... 4-4
Configurable KeyBar ........................................................................................................... 4-4
Print Setup........................................................................................................................... 4-6
Print Method .................................................................................................................. 4-6
Print Type ...................................................................................................................... 4-8
Out of Range ....................................................................................................................... 4-8
Text InputTool...................................................................................................................... 4-8
HotSpots............................................................................................................................ 4-10
Screen Panning ................................................................................................................. 4-11
Access Control / Device Lockdown ................................................................................... 4-11
HotKey Shortcuts............................................................................................................... 4-12
Shortcuts for Devices without Keypads ....................................................................... 4-13
Reset Menu Bar Code ................................................................................................. 4-13
Automatic Session Startup ................................................................................................ 4-13
Chapter 5 - ANSI
ANSI Client Overview .......................................................................................................... 5-1
Block Mode Communication .......................................................................................... 5-1
Scroll Mode Communication.......................................................................................... 5-1
Initialization .................................................................................................................... 5-1
Sending the Client Screen to the Host........................................................................... 5-2
Tabbing.......................................................................................................................... 5-3
ANSI Control Codes ............................................................................................................ 5-4
Using the 8-Bit Code Table............................................................................................ 5-4
8-Bit Code Table............................................................................................................ 5-4
C0 Codes: 7-Bit Control Codes ..................................................................................... 5-7
C1 Codes: 8-Bit Control Codes ................................................................................... 5-14
ANSI Escape Sequences .................................................................................................. 5-20
CBT - Cursor Backward Tabulation ............................................................................. 5-20
CHA - Cursor Horizontal Absolute ............................................................................... 5-21
CHT - Cursor Horizontal Tab ....................................................................................... 5-22
CNL - Cursor Next Line ............................................................................................... 5-23
CPL - Cursor Preceding Line....................................................................................... 5-24
CPR - Cursor Position Report...................................................................................... 5-25
CTC - Cursor Tabulation Control ................................................................................. 5-26
CUB - Cursor Back ...................................................................................................... 5-27
CUD - Cursor Down..................................................................................................... 5-28
CUF - Cursor Forward ................................................................................................. 5-29
CUP - Cursor Position Absolute .................................................................................. 5-30
CUU - Cursor Up ......................................................................................................... 5-31
CVT - Cursor Vertical Tab ........................................................................................... 5-31
iii
DAQ - Define Area Qualifications ................................................................................ 5-32
DCH - Delete Character............................................................................................... 5-34
DL - Delete Line........................................................................................................... 5-35
DMI - Disable Manual Input ......................................................................................... 5-36
DSR - Device Status Report ........................................................................................ 5-37
EA - Erase in Area ....................................................................................................... 5-38
ECH - Erase Character................................................................................................ 5-39
ED - Erase in Display................................................................................................... 5-40
EF - Erase in Field ....................................................................................................... 5-41
EL - Erase in Line ........................................................................................................ 5-42
EMI - Enable Manual Input .......................................................................................... 5-43
HVP - Horizontal Vertical Position ............................................................................... 5-43
ICH - Insert Character.................................................................................................. 5-44
IL - Insert Line.............................................................................................................. 5-45
MC - Media Copy......................................................................................................... 5-46
REP - Repeat Character.............................................................................................. 5-47
RM - Reset Mode......................................................................................................... 5-48
SEM - Select Editing Extent Mode............................................................................... 5-49
SM - Set Mode............................................................................................................. 5-50
TBC - Tab Clear........................................................................................................... 5-51
DEC Private Escape Sequences....................................................................................... 5-52
APM - Auto Print Mode ................................................................................................ 5-52
DECRM - DEC Reset Mode ........................................................................................ 5-52
DECSCA - Select Character Attribute ......................................................................... 5-53
DECSED - Selective Erase in Display ......................................................................... 5-54
DECSEL - Selective Erase in Line............................................................................... 5-55
DECSM - DEC Set Mode............................................................................................. 5-56
DECDHL - Double-Height Line .................................................................................... 5-57
DECDWL - Double-Width Line .................................................................................... 5-58
G0/G1/G2/G3 - Designate G0/G1/G2/G3 .................................................................... 5-58
PL - Print Line .............................................................................................................. 5-59
PS - Print Screen ......................................................................................................... 5-59
S7C1T - Select 7-Bit C1 Control Transmission ........................................................... 5-59
S8C1T - Select 8-Bit C1 Control Transmission ........................................................... 5-60
SI - Shift In (Lock Shift G0) .......................................................................................... 5-60
SO - Shift Out (Lock Shift G1) ..................................................................................... 5-60
Private Escape Sequences ............................................................................................... 5-61
LXERM - Reset Mode.................................................................................................. 5-61
LXESM - Set Mode ...................................................................................................... 5-62
Scanner Enable / Disable ............................................................................................ 5-63
Keyboard Enable / Disable .......................................................................................... 5-63
Enable/Disable Bar Code Symbologies............................................................................. 5-64
Specifying Bar Code, Keypad and Control Modes ............................................................ 5-64
Command String for Bar Code, Keypad and Control Modes....................................... 5-64
Left Justify Mode: p2.................................................................................................... 5-65
Clear Mode: p3 ............................................................................................................ 5-66
Truncate Mode: p4....................................................................................................... 5-66
Advance Mode: p5....................................................................................................... 5-67
iv
Specifying Transmit and Screen Function Setup .............................................................. 5-67
Command String for Transmit and Screen Function Setup ......................................... 5-67
Local Edit Commands ....................................................................................................... 5-69
Command String for Local Edit Match Field ................................................................ 5-69
Command String for Local Edit Wildcard..................................................................... 5-70
Using Local Edit........................................................................................................... 5-70
VT Host Key Descriptions............................................................................................ 5-72
Custom VT220 Host Commands....................................................................................... 5-74
Chapter 6 - ANSI Quick Reference Guide
Functionality List.................................................................................................................. 6-1
Notes ............................................................................................................................. 6-1
Cursor Positioning ......................................................................................................... 6-2
Forms............................................................................................................................. 6-3
Transmission To Host.................................................................................................... 6-4
Editing............................................................................................................................ 6-5
Character Rendition....................................................................................................... 6-5
Bar Code........................................................................................................................ 6-6
Reports / Status / Test ................................................................................................... 6-6
Printing........................................................................................................................... 6-6
Hat Encoding ....................................................................................................................... 6-7
DEC Special Graphics - Code Table ................................................................................. 6-10
IS0 8859-1 Character Set.................................................................................................. 6-11
Chapter 7 - IBM 3270
3270 Host Key Descriptions ................................................................................................ 7-1
Attention......................................................................................................................... 7-1
System Request ............................................................................................................ 7-1
Clear .............................................................................................................................. 7-1
Reset ............................................................................................................................. 7-1
Erase Input .................................................................................................................... 7-1
Erase to End of Field ..................................................................................................... 7-1
Delete ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
Insert.............................................................................................................................. 7-1
Home ............................................................................................................................. 7-1
Tab or Next .................................................................................................................... 7-1
Backtab or Previous....................................................................................................... 7-1
Enter .............................................................................................................................. 7-1
New Line........................................................................................................................ 7-1
Escape........................................................................................................................... 7-2
PA Keys ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
Function Keys ................................................................................................................ 7-2
3270 Commands ................................................................................................................. 7-2
Printing a Field............................................................................................................... 7-2
Beep .............................................................................................................................. 7-2
Custom IBM 3270 Host Commands .................................................................................... 7-2
v
Chapter 8 - IBM 5250
5250 Host Key Descriptions ................................................................................................ 8-1
Attention......................................................................................................................... 8-1
System Request ............................................................................................................ 8-1
Clear .............................................................................................................................. 8-1
Reset ............................................................................................................................. 8-1
Erase Input .................................................................................................................... 8-1
Erase to End of Field ..................................................................................................... 8-1
Field Minus .................................................................................................................... 8-1
Field Plus ....................................................................................................................... 8-1
Field Exit ........................................................................................................................ 8-1
Duplicate........................................................................................................................ 8-1
Field Mark ...................................................................................................................... 8-1
Delete ............................................................................................................................ 8-1
Insert.............................................................................................................................. 8-1
Home ............................................................................................................................. 8-2
Tab or Next .................................................................................................................... 8-2
Backtab or Previous....................................................................................................... 8-2
Enter .............................................................................................................................. 8-2
New Line........................................................................................................................ 8-2
Roll Up ........................................................................................................................... 8-2
Roll Down ...................................................................................................................... 8-2
Cursor Select ................................................................................................................. 8-2
Print ............................................................................................................................... 8-2
Function Keys ................................................................................................................ 8-2
5250 Commands ................................................................................................................. 8-2
Input Device ID (*K) ....................................................................................................... 8-2
Printing a Field............................................................................................................... 8-4
Beep .............................................................................................................................. 8-4
Terminal Setup .............................................................................................................. 8-4
Custom Mapping ................................................................................................................. 8-5
Custom Character Mapping........................................................................................... 8-5
Custom Keyboard Mapping ........................................................................................... 8-6
Custom IBM 5250 Host Commands .................................................................................... 8-6
Chapter 9 - Key Maps
RFTerm ToolBar.................................................................................................................. 9-1
RFTerm Functions .............................................................................................................. 9-5
Functions Not Supported ............................................................................................... 9-5
Virtual Key Maps ................................................................................................................. 9-6
RFTerm Functions - Virtual Keys................................................................................... 9-6
ANSI Functions - Virtual Keys ....................................................................................... 9-8
IBM 3270 Functions - Virtual Keys ................................................................................ 9-9
IBM 5250 Functions - Virtual Keys .............................................................................. 9-10
Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps.............................................................................................. 9-11
Dolphin 70e Black Keymaps.............................................................................................. 9-12
Virtual Keyboards ........................................................................................................ 9-12
vi
Tecton and MX7 Key Maps ............................................................................................... 9-14
RFTerm Functions - MX7 and MX7 Tecton ................................................................. 9-15
ANSI Functions - MX7 and MX7 Tecton...................................................................... 9-17
IBM 3270 Functions - MX7 and MX7 Tecton............................................................... 9-20
IBM 5250 Functions - MX7 and MX7 Tecton............................................................... 9-23
Thor VM1 Key Maps.......................................................................................................... 9-26
RFTerm Functions - Thor VM1 .................................................................................... 9-27
ANSI Functions - Thor VM1......................................................................................... 9-29
IBM 3270 Functions - Thor VM1.................................................................................. 9-31
IBM 5250 Functions - Thor VM1.................................................................................. 9-33
Thor VM2 Key Maps.......................................................................................................... 9-35
External 21-Key Numeric Keypad................................................................................ 9-35
External 95-Key Keyboard........................................................................................... 9-35
External 60-Key Keyboard........................................................................................... 9-35
RFTerm Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad...................................................... 9-36
ANSI Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad .......................................................... 9-36
IBM 3270 Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad ................................................... 9-36
IBM 5250 Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad ................................................... 9-36
Thor VM3 Key Maps.......................................................................................................... 9-37
External 21-Key Numeric Keypad................................................................................ 9-37
External 95-Key Keyboard........................................................................................... 9-37
External 60-Key Keyboard........................................................................................... 9-37
RFTerm Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad...................................................... 9-38
ANSI Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad .......................................................... 9-38
IBM 3270 Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad ................................................... 9-38
IBM 5250 Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad ................................................... 9-38
External Keyboards for Vehicle Mounted Computers........................................................ 9-39
21-Key Numeric Keypad.............................................................................................. 9-39
95-Key Keyboard ......................................................................................................... 9-40
60-Key Keyboard ......................................................................................................... 9-44
Marathon Key Maps .......................................................................................................... 9-49
RFTerm Functions - Marathon..................................................................................... 9-50
ANSI Functions - Marathon ......................................................................................... 9-51
IBM 3270 Functions - Marathon .................................................................................. 9-52
IBM 5250 Functions - Marathon .................................................................................. 9-53
HX2 Key Maps................................................................................................................... 9-54
Important Note for Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad ........................................................... 9-54
RFTerm Functions - HX2............................................................................................. 9-55
ANSI Functions - HX2.................................................................................................. 9-58
IBM 3270 Functions - HX2........................................................................................... 9-61
IBM 5250 Functions - HX2........................................................................................... 9-64
MX3Plus, MX3X, VX3Plus and VX3X Key Maps .............................................................. 9-67
RFTerm Functions - MX3Plus / MX3X / VX3Plus / VX3X............................................ 9-68
ANSI Functions - MX3Plus / MX3X / VX3Plus / VX3X ................................................ 9-69
IBM 3270 Functions - MX3Plus / MX3X / VX3Plus / VX3X ......................................... 9-70
IBM 5250 Functions - MX3Plus / MX3X / VX3Plus / VX3X ......................................... 9-71
MX8 Key Maps .................................................................................................................. 9-72
RFTerm Functions - MX8 ............................................................................................ 9-73
vii
ANSI Functions - MX8 ................................................................................................. 9-75
IBM 3270 Functions - MX8 .......................................................................................... 9-77
IBM 5250 Functions - MX8 .......................................................................................... 9-79
MX9 Key Maps .................................................................................................................. 9-81
RFTerm Functions - MX9 ............................................................................................ 9-82
ANSI Functions - MX9 ................................................................................................. 9-84
IBM 3270 Functions - MX9 .......................................................................................... 9-86
IBM 5250 Functions - MX9 .......................................................................................... 9-88
VX6 and VX7 Key Maps .................................................................................................... 9-90
VX6 60-key Keyboard.................................................................................................. 9-90
VX7 External 60-Key Keyboard ................................................................................... 9-90
VX7 External 95-Key Keyboard ................................................................................... 9-90
Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 Key Maps ................................................................................... 9-90
Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 External 60-Key Keyboard ................................................... 9-90
Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 External 95-Key Keyboard ................................................... 9-90
Chapter 10 - Customer Support
Product Service and Repair............................................................................................... 10-1
Technical Assistance......................................................................................................... 10-1
viii
1
Overview
RFTerm allows users to connect to applications running on IBM® 3270, AS/400 and VT hosts from a Microsoft® Windows®
equipped mobile computer over a wireless TCP/IP data network.
RFTerm can be used to directly communicate with host applications. Users can connect and log on to the host applications
without the need for an intermediary device.
Assumptions
This reference guide assumes you have working knowledge of:
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows user interface metaphor and terminology.
Stylus based touch screen navigation terminology.
Basic knowledge of concepts and terms for wireless networking.
Basic operations and requirements of the host applications you want to access with terminal emulation clients.
Conventions Used in this Guide
This guide uses the following typographical conventions:
• All user actions and interactions with the application are in bold, as in Session > Configure.
• All text associated with sample or configuration files is presented in a special font:
# This is a sample configuration file for…
# #################################################
[options]
recursion=true
silent=true
checkonly=false
Supported Devices
The following devices support RFTerm:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tecton (Windows CE 6.0, Windows Mobile 6.5)
Thor VM1 (Windows CE 6.0, Windows Embedded Standard 2009)
Thor VM2 (Windows CE 6.0, Windows Embedded Standard 2009, Windows 7, Windows Embedded Standard 7)
Thor VM3 (Windows Embedded Compact 7, Windows 7, Windows Embedded Standard 7, Windows 10)
Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 (Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows Embedded Standard 2009)
Marathon (Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows Embedded Standard 2009)
Dolphin 70e Black (Windows Embedded Handheld 6.5) as part of the Honeywell Wearable Solution
RFTerm was also supported on several obsolete devices. Keymaps for obsolete devices may be included in Key Maps (page 91).
1-1
About RFTerm
Information about RFTerm can be viewed by selecting File > About.
The About screen contains important information about RFTerm, including:
• The platform on which RFTerm is installed (Windows XP, Windows CE, etc)
• The revision level of RFTerm
• Copyrights and licensing information. Click the PuTTY License button, if present, to display the PuTTY License (PuTTY is
used for SSH).
Click the OK button to dismiss the About screen.
Feature Highlights
SSH Protocol
When using Secure Shell (SSH), a connection is established to an SSH server and Telnet traffic is tunneled or port forwarded through the SSH connection. RFTerm supports SSH version 2.
For outgoing traffic from RFTerm:
• SSH client (built into RFTerm) listens on a local IP port for Telnet traffic
• SSH client encrypts the Telnet traffic and sends it to the SSH server
• The SSH server decrypts the Telnet traffic and forwards the traffic to the Telnet host.
For incoming traffic to RFTerm:
• The SSH server receives Telnet traffic from the host application, encrypts the traffic and sends it to the SSH client (built
into RFTerm)
• The SSH client decrypts the traffic and passes it to the RFTerm Telnet session.
Encryption methods are auto negotiated between the client software (RFTerm) and the SSH server. Supported encryption
methods include:
•
•
•
•
•
AES (Rijndael) - 256, 192, or 128-bit SDCTR or CBC
Arcfour (RC4) - 256 or 128-bit stream cipher
Blowfish - 256-bit SDCTR or 128-bit CBC
Triple-DES - 168-bit SDCTR or CBC
Single-DES - 56-bit CBC
Note: Arcfour and Single DES are not very secure. A warning box is displayed if either of these encryption methods is
selected.
There are two message boxes that may be displayed for SSH server host keys:
• If the key does not exist in the registry, a message box asks if you want to add the key and connect to the SSH server.
1-2
• A message box is displayed if the SSH server host key changes.
If SSH is not enabled, transmission is over an unencrypted Telnet connection.
Multiple Host Sessions
RFTerm supports up to four simultaneous pre-defined host sessions. All sessions run under a single application process.
Interactive, per session configuration settings are maintained. Users may connect with any permutation of 3270, 5250 or
VT host sessions. HotKeys and menu context are available to jump between these sessions.
Swapping Between Sessions
Various HotKeys are defined to allow the user to swap to a specified session or to jump to the next connected session.
A Session Menu can be enabled to display information on configured sessions.
HotSpots
A HotSpot is an invisible field on the mobile client screen where a user can tap with a stylus to execute a function. A
HotSpot allows a user to interact with the host application with minimal need for the special key pads. Instead the user can
directly tap on the text in the display to invoke the desired operation.
Screen Panning
Panning allows an additional row and column on the display by providing an alternative to horizontal and vertical scroll bars.
Imagine the host application screen as a large sheet under the display on the hand-held device. Screen Panning allows
users to “tap” and “drag” this sheet in any direction to move hidden areas of the host display into view on the hand-held
device without the use of scroll bars.
Configurable KeyBar
The configurable KeyBar allows users to customize a set of soft buttons to control and invoke any host specific keys or
emulator operation. Users can select from a set of pre-defined KeyBar templates. In addition they can also configure up to
four custom templates of their own. Users can navigate between a selected set of templates.
SmartPads
All host applications have specific keyboard requirements. The SmartPad is a floating button pad which provides support
for special emulation host keys. Depending upon the current configured host emulation type, the appropriate SmartPad for
that emulation is displayed. The SmartPad supports all the popular 3270, 5250 and VT host keys.
Note: This option is not available devices with a Microsoft® Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded
Standard operating system.
Access Control
Access Control allows administrators to prevent users from changing the TE configuration for deployed devices. Administrators can require a password to change the session configuration and application settings.
Device Lockdown
Lockdown allows administrators to prevent users from exiting the TE client. Lockdown also prevents users from running
any other application on the device.
Configurable Fonts
This option allows users to increase or decrease the font sizes of displayed text.
Color Schemes
Support for color displays. A color scheme is a collection of colors mapped to a set of screen display attributes. Users can
select from pre-defined color schemes or create a custom scheme based upon their preferences. Applications dynamically
detect LCD displays to self configure for a two color scheme (Black on White).
1-3
Automatic Login
Users can configure one or more host sessions to automatically launch when the TE application is started. Pre-defined
login scripts can be configured to launch automatically and log into the host system.
Automatic Session Persistence
Latest values of session configuration are automatically saved for every session.
Dynamic Cursor View Modes
Multiple cursor modes are available to support automatic scrolling, so that the cursor / input field is visible. These view
modes are configurable on a per client session basis. The screen display window will “track” and follow the cursor.
Text InputTool
The Text InputTool improves upon the typical Windows CE/Windows Embedded Compact soft keypad by sending complete
text strings to the display window at the current cursor location. A user can cache often-used text strings in the InputTool.
Note: This option is not available devices with a Microsoft® Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded
Standard operating system.
Device / LU Name Support
For IBM emulations (3270 and 5250), logical unit device name resource configuration is supported. This is used during
connection negotiations.
Automatic Re-connection
If for some reason the network connection to the host is lost, the user can configure the session to automatically attempt to
re-connect to the host.
Full VT220 Support
This includes support for multinational character sets and NRC support.
VT Line Mode
This is a special optimization for VT host sessions. Data is buffered locally within the device prior to sending it to the host.
Line mode optimizes usage of the network bandwidth and host resources.
VT Answerback String
This is a configurable text string that certain host applications require to identify the mobile client.
HotKeys
Predefined HotKeys, shortcuts, are available to interact with and invoke application operations.
Block Mode
Block mode communication is a communication mode that enables the device to send an entire block of data to the host at
one time. Block mode greatly reduces RF traffic by sending data in this way. Block mode minimizes RF overhead better
than the other modes. Thus, block mode supports more users on an RF channel and allows faster response time.
Local echo is a process that allows each character to display locally at the device as the user presses the keys. The host
does not see these characters until the user presses the [Enter] key.
Note: In most cases, operations using programming tools that include screen painters cannot use block mode
communication. Screen painters or designers usually come with programming tools such as Oracle, Ingress,
Informix, and Powerhouse, which normally use character mode communications.
Programmable Function Keys
User can configure all available function keys, and the 4 arrow keys, to perform text and control character inputs. Control
characters and characters not accessible from the keyboard can be represented using Hat Encoding (page 6-7).
1-4
Printing
User can print the screen for any session using the shortcut key [Ctrl] [Alt] [P], or by sending print commands to the client
from the host in 5250 and ANSI sessions.
Help
User can display frequently used RFTerm shortcut keys and support contact information by pressing [Ctrl] [H].
Double Byte Support
RFTerm supports Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean and Japanese font sets for VT emulations based upon
TELNET data being received in standard DBCS format.
Installation
To verify the version of RFTerm currently installed, see the About RFTerm (page 1-2) panel.
Your device may require special installation procedures. Review the information below for details.
Installation Note
Evaluation copies of RFTerm allow the user to Connect eleven (11) times. The Software License Agreement dialog
appears after each connect request and before the connection is activated. Select either Accept or Reject to continue.
When the counter reaches 0, you cannot use the RFTerm Connect function until the evaluation version of RFTerm is activated.
Initial Installation (Windows CE, Windows Embedded Compact, or Windows Mobile)
For devices with a Windows CE, Windows Embedded Compact, or Windows Mobile operating system, use the procedures
listed below. RFTerm may already be installed on the device.
1. Launch the RFTerm cab file.
2. Launch RFTerm to complete the installation.
Note: For RFTerm to persist after a device restart, place the RFTerm.cab file in the \System folder.
Upgrading from an Earlier Version of RFTerm
When you upgrade RFTerm to a new release version, you must begin with a clean registry. Use the procedures listed
below for devices equipped with Windows CE, Windows Embedded Compact, or Windows Mobile.
1. Exit RFTerm if it is currently running.
2. Open the registry editor.
3. Delete the entire registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\RFTerm.
4. Do not delete the LXE key or any other items under it except RFTerm.
5. Launch the RFTerm cab file.
6. Launch RFTerm to complete the installation.
Installation (All Other Windows Operating Systems)
For devices with a Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard operating system, the following
steps must be taken to ensure RFTerm can read and write to the registry before initial installation or upgrading to a newer
revision:
1. Log on as the Administrator.
2. Open the registry editor.
3. Delete the entire registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\HSM\RFTerm or
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\RFTerm (key name/location depends on equipment type and RFTerm
revision level).
1-5
4. Do not delete the HSM or LXE key or any other items under it except RFTerm.
5. Browse to the location of the RFTermSetupWN.msi file, double-click on the file and follow the setup wizard prompts.
6. Launch RFTerm for the initial time as the administrator. For devices with Windows 7, Windows Embedded Standard 7,
or Windows 10 right click on the RFTerm icon and select Run as administrator.
7. This will create the RFTerm registry with guest privileges.
Quick Start
This section is for advanced users who can comfortably navigate within Windows and Windows CE and are familiar with host
terminal emulation details. Follow these steps to connect to your host application with minimal configuration setup. For details
on various configuration parameters, it is recommended that you read through the following sections.
1. Make sure the mobile network settings are configured. If you are connecting over wireless LAN, make sure your device is
communicating with the Access Point. If you are connecting via WWAN, make sure your device has an active connection.
Details on configuring the mobile network settings can be found in the reference guide for the mobile device.
2. If the RFTerm splash screen does not automatically appear after startup or rebooting, go to Start > Programs, and select
Honeywell RFTerm or double-click the RFTerm icon on the Windows desktop.
3. Select Session > Configure from the application menu and select the Host Type that you require. This will depend on the
type of host system that you are trying to connect to; i.e. 3270 mainframe, AS/400 5250 server or VT host.
4. Enter the Host Address of the host system to which you wish to connect. This may either be a DNS name or an IP address
of the host system.
5. Update the Telnet Port number, if your host application is configured to listen on a specific port. If not, just use the default
Telnet port.
6. Select OK.
7. Select Session > Connect from the application menu or tap the Connect button on the Command Bar. Upon a successful
connection, you should see the host application screen displayed.
8. During the connection process, the following popup dialog appears:
1-6
RFTerm Screen Sizes
The RFTerm screen displays are designed to function on most Windows-based computers, regardless of the physical
screen size.
RFTerm menus and editing parameters, save and exit options are available on-screen, where needed, regardless of the
size of the screen. On-screen they may look or be named differently from one device to the other yet they will perform the
same function when activated.
RFTerm uses a one-quarter screen, switchable
between horizontal or vertical orientation on the
Windows Embedded Handheld equipped Dolphin
70e Black.
RFTerm uses a one-quarter screen, horizontally
oriented on the HX2.
RFTerm uses a one-quarter screen, vertically
oriented on the Windows CE equipped MX7 Tecton,
MX8 and MX9.
RFTerm uses a one-quarter screen, vertically
oriented on the Windows Mobile equipped MX7
Tecton, MX8 and MX9.
1-7
RFTerm uses a one-half screen, horizontally oriented
on the MX3Plus, MX3X, VX3Plus, VX3X and VX6.
RFTerm uses a full screen on the Thor VM2, Thor
VM3, VX7, Thor VX8 and Thor VX9.
RFTerm uses a WVGA full screen on the Thor VM1
and Marathon.
This guide makes the assumption that the user or systems administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows standard navigation/performance for each of their devices running RFTerm.
Therefore, the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to RFTerm.
Important Notes
For Devices with a Windows Mobile or Windows Embedded Handheld operating system:
•
•
•
•
The MenuBar is displayed at the bottom of the Windows Mobile screen and cannot be led to the top of the screen.
By default, the KeyBar is hidden but can be accessed from the MenuBar using the KeyBar icon.
When accessed, the KeyBar is displayed above the MenuBar. Clicking the KeyBar icon again hides the KeyBar.
The ToolBar is not available on devices with a Windows Mobile operating system.
For Devices with a Windows XP, Windows 7, Windos 10, or Windows Embedded Standard operating system:
• SmartPads, Text InputTool, and Hide/Display All Bars are not available on devices with a Windows XP, Windows 7 or
Windows Embedded Standard operating system.
• The MenuBar is displayed at the top of the screen for these devices and cannot be led to the bottom of the screen.
1-8
Quick Tips
Screen Panning
• For all connected sessions (3270, 5250 and VT), you can “tap-and-drag” the display screen in any direction with your
stylus. Just make sure that HotSpots are enabled in Options1 (page 2-6).
HotSpots
• For all connected sessions (3270, 5250 and VT), you can “double tap” anywhere on the screen to invoke an Enter
(or Send) operation.
• To use HotSpots, you can directly tap the function key text string on the display rather than use a SmartPad. Refer
to HotSpots (page 4-10) for details.
Predefined HotKeys (Shortcuts)
• Almost every application operation has a HotKey associated with it. HotKeys provide an efficient alternative to
invoke an operation or action. Refer to HotKey Shortcuts (page 4-12).
Readability
• For more screen real estate, you can minimize the application menu. You can also move open windows to anywhere
on the screen (unless the windows are locked to prevent edit).
• You can select different background, foreground and attribute colors for enhanced visual readability. For mobile
clients with LCD display screens, the default color scheme is automatically detected and configured to “Bright White”
for optimal readability.
Data Input
• If you have the same data strings that you input all the time, you can cache it in the data input tool. You can then
“send” the text string to the emulator with a single stylus tap. Refer toText InputTool (page 4-8).
Note: This option is not available on devices with a Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded
Standard operating system.
Configurable KeyBar
• The soft KeyBar can be configured to perform most emulator and host operations with a single stylus tap. Refer to
Configurable KeyBar (page 4-4).
Access Control
• You can prevent a user from changing the TE configuration by specifying an access password. Refer to Access
Control / Device Lockdown (page 4-11).
Application ToolBar
• An integrated ToolBar is provided for touch screen navigation.
• Refer to RFTerm ToolBar (page 9-1) to identify the function for the icons that are included in the different application
touch KeyBars.
Miscellaneous
• The RFTerm emulator will automatically save configuration settings for the four most recent sessions, S1 - S4 as
displayed in the menu. The configuration settings are saved in the mobile client registry. Refer to the mobile client
reference guide for instruction.
• To launch RFTerm automatically, refer to the reference guide for the device.
• Support tools and procedures are available to provide deployment configurations to self-install and restore
application and mobile client configurations during a cold boot.
1-9
1 - 10
2
RFTerm Settings
This section describes application wide settings. All these parameters may be set using the application settings dialogs
accessed from the File > Settings application menu. Parameters configured through the File > Settings dialog apply to all terminal emulation sessions.
!
For Microsoft Windows 7, Windows Embedded 7, and Windows 10:
It is necessary to run to run RFTerm as an administrator when modifying these settings because RFTerm must be able to
access and make changes to the Windows registry.
Rather than selecting to run as administrator each time, right click on the RFTerm icon and select Properties. Tap the
Compatibility tab and check Run this program as an administrator. This modification affects the current user only unless Change settings for all users is tapped before changing the privilege level.
Display
The client screen display may be configured to optimize screen available area and readability. These options may be configured
for connected or non-connected host sessions. HotKeys are available to le the options on and off.
• From the application menu, select File > Settings.
• A Settings dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Display tab.
Parameters
Menu
ToolBars, KeyBars, Shortcut Keys and Windows Mobile
By default, the ToolBar button function is configured as part of the KeyBar on devices with a Windows Mobile operating system so the checkbox for the ToolBar does not exist on the Settings > Display tab.
ToolBar buttons can be removed from the KeyBar on devices with a Windows Mobile operating system.
ToolBar buttons can be hidden by using [Ctrl][Shift][K] which makes the entire KeyBar hidden on devices with a
Windows Mobile operating system.
The Hide ToolBar shortcut key [Ctrl][Shift][T] is not available on devices with a Windows Mobile operating system.
Hide All Bars
Checking this box will hide the file menu, the KeyBar and the ToolBar. Pressing [Ctrl][Shift][L] alternates
between the hidden and visible states. This will override each individual item listed below.
Not available on devices with a Windows Mobile operating system.
2-1
Disable/Hide MenuBar
Checking this box will hide the MenuBar on devices with a Windows CE or Windows Embedded Compact operating system. Pressing [Ctrl][Shift][M] alternates between the hidden and visible states.
When the MenuBar is hidden, the KeyBar is displayed on the bottom row, where the MenuBar is normally shown.
When MenuBar is led on, the KeyBar is displayed on the row above the MenuBar.
Checking this box disables the MenuBar on devices with a Microsoft Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or
Windows Embedded Standard operating system.
Note: This parameter is titled Disable MenuBar on devices with a Microsoft Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows
10, or Windows Embedded Standard operating system and Hide MenuBar on devices with a Windows CE,
Windows Embedded Compact, or Windows Mobile operating system.
Hide KeyBar
Checking this box will hide the KeyBar. The default is checked (hide KeyBar). Click the K icon on the MenuBar to
launch the KeyBar. Pressing [Ctrl][Shift][K] will alternate between the hidden and visible states.
When the MenuBar is hidden, the KeyBar is displayed on the bottom row, where the MenuBar is normally shown.
When MenuBar is led on, the KeyBar is displayed on the row above the MenuBar.
On devices equipped with Windows Mobile, the ToolBar buttons can be hidden by using [Ctrl][Shift][K] and the
entire KeyBar is hidden on these devices.
Hide ToolBar
Checking this box will hide the ToolBar. Pressing [Ctrl][Shift][T] alternates between the hidden and visible states.
Not available on devices with a Windows Mobile operating system.
(Menu) at Bottom
Checking this box will move the menu to the bottom of the screen. Pressing [Ctrl][Shift][B] alternates the location between the top and bottom of the screen.
Note: This option is not available on devices with a Microsoft Windows XP, Windows 7, Window 10, or Windows
Embedded Standard operating system.
Hide OIA (IBM only)
Checking this box will le hiding of the OIA or the Operator Information Area. This option applies only to IBM 3270
and 5250 emulations.
Pressing [Ctrl][Shift][O] or [Alt] [T] alternates between the hidden and visible states.
Scroll Bars
Hide Vertical Scroll Bars
Checking this box will hide the vertical scroll bar. Pressing [Ctrl][Shift][V] alternates between the hide and visible
states.
Hide Horizontal Scroll Bars
Checking this box will hide the horizontal scroll bar. Pressing [Ctrl][Shift][H] alternates between the hide and visible states.
Disable Touch Screen
When checked, this option prevents the user from inadvertently moving the cursor via the touch screen. The touch
screen within the RFTerm display portion of the screen is disabled while still allowing RFTerm HotSpots to function
using touch. Items such as scroll bars and menu items still are accessible via the touch screen.
The default value for Disable Touch Screen is “Not Disabled” (blank).
2-2
Shortcuts
Keypress shortcuts can be enabled or disabled from the Shortcuts tab.
• All shortcut keys can be enabled or disabled at once. Shortcut keys can be disabled or enabled individually as well.
• From the application menu, select File > Settings.
• A Settings dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Shortcuts tab
Parameters
Jump to Inactive Sessions
When the Jump to Inactive Sessions item is selected, the user can use the shortcut key sequence [Ctrl] [Shift] [J] to
jump to an inactive session that has a host name specified. The inactive session remains dormant when disconnected, but when it becomes the active session again, it automatically attempts to reconnect and run the Autologin
script.
Disable Shortcut Keys
When the Disable Shortcut Keys item is checked, RFTerm prevents the user from accessing all shortcut keys with the
exception of Session, Configure and Application Exit shortcut keys. This also activates the “Allow Session Shortcuts”
check box. F1, F2, F3, and F4 function keys remain active. Refer to RFTerm ToolBar (page 9-1) for a complete list of
RFTerm shortcut keys.
Buttons
Select All
Click this button to disable all shortcut keys, in the list, at once. Click a shortcut key checkbox to enable the
individual shortcut while the rest remain disabled (checked). The Select All button has no effect on the Jump
to Inactive Sessions checkbox.
Clear All
Click this button to enable all shortcut keys, in the list, at once. Click a shortcut key checkbox to disable
(check) the individual shortcut while the rest remain enabled. The Clear All button has no effect on the Jump
to Inactive Sessions checkbox.
2-3
Shortcuts Active Until Disabled
The shortcut is disabled when the checkbox has a check mark. Refer to HotKey Shortcuts (page 4-12) for a complete list of default HotKeys.
Note: Depending on mobile client screen size constraints, the parameter name may be abbreviated based on the
parameter names shown in the list that follows.
2-4
Parameter
Shortcut Key
Description
Configure
[Ctrl][Shift][N]
Configure a host connection
Settings
[Ctrl][Shift][E]
Configure application settings.
Connect
[Ctrl][Shift][C]
Connect to the host
(Manual Reconnect shortcut)
Status
[Ctrl][Shift][2]
Display or hide Status Window.
(Not supported on Windows Mobile)
Decrease Font
[Ctrl][Shift][Down Arrow]
Decrease font size
Disconnect
[Ctrl][Shift][D]
Disconnect a connected host session
(Manual Disconnect shortcut)
le HScroll
[Ctrl][Shift][H]
Display or hide horizontal scroll bar
le SmartPad
[Ctrl][Shift][P]
Display or hide SmartPad
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10,
or Windows Embedded Standard)
le InputPad
[Ctrl][Shift][I]
Display or hide Text InputTool
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10,
or Windows Embedded Standard)
le MenuBar
[Ctrl][Shift][M]
Display or hide MenuBar
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10,
or Windows Embedded Standard)
Move All Bars
[Ctrl][Shift][B]
Display all bars at the bottom
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10,
or Windows Embedded Standard)
le All Bars
[Ctrl][Shift][L]
Display or Hide all bars (Menu, Tool, Key)
le ToolBar
[Ctrl][Shift][T]
Display or Hide ToolBar
le KeyBar
[Ctrl][Shift][K]
Display or Hide KeyBar
le VScroll
[Ctrl][Shift][V]
Display or Hide vertical scroll bar
Increase Font
[Ctrl][Shift][Up Arrow]
Increase font size
Next Session
[Ctrl][Shift][J]
Jump to next connected host
(Session Control shortcut)
Scroll Down
[Shift][Down Arrow]
Scroll down one row
Scroll Left
[Shift][Left Arrow]
Scroll left one column
Scroll Right
[Shift][Right Arrow]
Scroll right one column
Scroll Up
[Shift][Up Arrow]
Scroll up one row
le Bold
[Ctrl][Shift][1]
le between bold and normal font
Print Screen
[Ctrl][Alt][P]
Print the screen of the active session
Program Help
[Ctrl][H]
Display frequently used shortcuts
Jump to Session 1
[Ctrl][Alt][1]
Jump to Session 1
Jump to Session 2
[Ctrl][Alt][2]
Jump to Session 2
Jump to Session 3
[Ctrl][Alt][3]
Jump to Session 3
Jump to Session 4
[Ctrl][Alt][4]
Jump to Session 4
Parameter
Shortcut Key
Description
Show Session Menu
[Ctrl][Alt][0]
Display Session Host Menu (if enabled) over top of a
connected session
Session Save
[Ctrl][Shift][S]
Invoke the session save dialog
Exit RFTerm
[Ctrl][Shift][X]
Exit the emulator
le OIA Bar
[Ctrl][Shift][O] or [Alt][T]
Hide and unhide status bar (OIA)
Advance Down
[Ctrl][Down Arrow]
Scroll down one row segment (see Note below)
Advance Left
[Ctrl][Left Arrow]
Scroll left one column segment (see Note below)
Advance Right
[Ctrl][Right Arrow]
Scroll right one column segment (see Note below)
Advance Up
[Ctrl][Up Arrow]
Scroll up one row segment (see Note below)
le Status
[Ctrl][Shift][2]
Display or hide status icons
(must be enabled on the Settings > Status tab first)
(Not supported on Windows Mobile, Windows XP, Windows
7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard)
Note: Depending on the mobile device screen and font size constraints, the segment area used by an Advance
Down, Advance Left, Advance Right or Advance Up key sequence is approximately one-quarter of the total
area available.
2-5
Options1
General options may be configured and updated from the Options1 tab.
Note: This tab was previously labeled Options.
• From the application menu, select File > Settings.
• A Settings dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Options1 tab
Parameters
Access Control
Hide Start Menu
When the Hide Start Menu item is selected, RFTerm prevents the user from accessing functionalities within the
task bar.
With Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard
This feature makes the application full-screen and also disables window resizing.
While this option hides the Start Menu, it cannot prevent the user from accessing the Start Menu via the Windows key.
With Windows Mobile
When the Hide Start Menu / Disable Start Menu item is selected, neither the Start Menu nor the OK button
responds to a stylus tap. Use an Enter keypress to close the Settings and Configure window.
Disable App Exit
When enabled, this option disables the application exit button and the [Alt][X] shortcut key. This prevents the user
from exiting the application.
Exit Now
This button is enabled only when the Disable App Exit option is checked. It allows the administrator to save the
configuration and exit when Disable App Exit is checked. Typical use would be for an administrator to set all configuration settings including a config password and exit the application using this button. Subsequently, users will
not be able to exit the application and the config password will be required to change the configuration.
Config Password
The Config Password button prompts the user for a dialog access password. When a password is set, users must
enter this password prior to viewing and modifying the session and settings configuration. This capability enables
administrators to prevent users from changing the application configuration settings in controlled environments.
2-6
Confirm Disconnect
When enabled, the user is prompted before every attempt to disconnect an active session.
Enable HotSpots
Checking this box will enable HotSpots and Screen Panning on mobile clients with touch screens. A HotSpot is a field
on the screen where a user can tap with a stylus to execute a function. This allows a user to interact with a host application with minimal need for special keys. Checking this box is a requirement for the Enlarge HotSpots parameter.
For example
A simple example might be the use of F Keys. An operation associated with an F key might be displayed on the screen
as “F1 = Help”. RFTerm automatically detects this as a HotSpot and will simulate an F1 key being pressed on the keyboard when you tap on the F1 text on the screen display. Refer to HotSpots (page 4-10) for further details.
Note: Reprogramming the function keys using the Fn Keys tab under the Configure dialog alters the operation of a
function key HotSpot.
Enlarge HotSpots
Prerequisite:
Enable HotSpots must be enabled (checked).
Checking this box increases the size of the HotSpot area, slightly, radiating from the center of the HotSpot. If a screen
does not have a HotSpot area, this parameter setting is ignored until a screen is presented that has a HotSpot area.
For example, enlarging the HotSpot area may assist clicking the correct HotSpot even if the mobile client is being jostled by outside influences.
When Enable HotSpots is disabled, the Enlarge HotSpots parameter is dimmed and cannot be activated.
Check Network Status
This setting determines if RFTerm continuously monitors the network connection.
Note: This option is not available on devices equipped with a Windows Mobile or Windows Embedded Handheld
operating system.
If the checkbox is checked (enabled) RFTerm polls the network adapter every two seconds to verify the network status.
If the network adapter is not connected, a dialog box is displayed.
Two conditions must be present for network polling to occur:
1. The Check Network Status checkbox must be checked.
2. There must be at least one active session.
There is no user input on the popup notification. The popup box is displayed until the network connection is re-established and the user is restricted from entering any data into or exiting from RFTerm while the notification is present.
Once network connection is reestablished, the notification automatically is dismissed.
If the checkbox is unchecked (disabled) RFTerm does not monitor the network connection. The Out of Range notification is not displayed until a data transmission fails. This is the default selection.
2-7
The user is present with a popup dialog. The Retry button attempts to reconnect to the network. The Cancel button
exits RFTerm.
Note: There is no Cancel button if the application is locked down by disabling application exit and/or by hiding the start
menu. You must either re-establish the connection to the host or have the administrator intervene.
Disable Scan On Exit Focus
When checked, this option turns off the scanner when RFTerm is no longer the application in focus. When RFTerm
returns to focus, the scanner is turned back on.
When disabled, the scanner remains active at all times.
The default is disabled.
KeyBars
This button is used to configure the KeyBar. KeyBar configuration consists of both the KeyBar Cycle and any Custom
KeyBars. The KeyBar function keys can be reprogrammed using the Fn Keys tab under the Configure dialog.
Note: The KeyBars button was previously labeled Config Keys.
KeyBar Cycle
A KeyBar is the set of keys visible at one time. The KeyBar Cycle is a collection of KeyBars that can be visible.
The user “cycles” through the collection of KeyBars by tapping the arrow buttons on either end of the current KeyBar. Each key on the KeyBar is associated with a host or emulator operation. Users are allowed a maximum of
eighteen KeyBars, four of which can be customized. The same KeyBar may be added multiple times to the KeyBar Cycle.
Custom Bar
A Custom KeyBar (Custom Keys 1 through Custom Keys 4) can also be included in the KeyBar Cycle. Tapping
the Custom Bar tab allows the user to configure a custom KeyBar. There are over 180 buttons to choose from,
refer to RFTerm ToolBar (page 9-1) for available choices.
2-8
To edit a Custom KeyBar
•
•
•
•
•
In the KeyBar Cycle tab, add a Custom Bar to the KeyBar Cycle
In the Custom Bar tab, select the Custom Bar that you want to configure
Select the Key or operation that you want to appear on this custom bar
Tap Add to Above. The selected key / operation will appear in the list.
Delete unwanted keys by selecting them and tapping Delete.
You can add up to a maximum of 8 key buttons on each Custom Bar (fewer on some devices). The entry for Previous KeyBar cannot be removed and must exist in each KeyBar to allow for “cycling” between KeyBars. Typically, the last key should be Next KeyBar for cycling to the next KeyBar.
One powerful capability of the KeyBar is the ability to associate keys with the Text InputTool. Key entries Input 1
through Input 20 are tied to the corresponding twenty entries in the Text InputTool. Thus if you have a text string
configured in the data input tool, this string can be submitted to the host application by tapping on the Input X key
in a Custom KeyBar. Tapping this key will send the complete text string to the current cursor location. For VT client sessions, escape sequences can be added to the Text InputTool text. This allows users to configure custom
escape sequences as required by their host applications.
Escape sequences can be entered into the Text InputTool in the following format:
\e =
\n =
\r =
\t =
\xDD
Escape
Newline
Enter or Return
Tab
= Hexadecimal value
Note: The list of keys that are available for a Custom KeyBar includes “Escape”. The Escape icon is identical for
VT Escape and 3270 Escape, both listed in RFTerm ToolBar (page 9-1) icon listing. When setting up a
Custom KeyBar for VT or IBM, and VT Escape or 3270 Escape is required, select the “Escape” icon.
2-9
Options2
Determines the behavior of RFTerm in certain circumstances.
• From the application menu, select File > Settings.
• A Settings dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Options2 tab
Parameters
Respond DONT encryption
Determines the behavior of RFTerm response to WILL encryption.
• When checked, RFTerm responds DONT.
• When unchecked, RFTerm responds WONT.
The default is unchecked (WONT).
Focus Control
Determines if RFTerm remains the focus window when another dialog attempts to grab focus.
• Normal - RFTerm does not override. (default)
• Foreground - RFTerm forces the focus back to RFTerm if a “Backup Battery Low” dialog grabs focus.
Script File
Note: This option pertains to the Marathon computer with all available operating systems. This parameter has no effect
on other devices.
If Freefloat Link One is not active (or not installed) an error message may be displayed when trying to set this option.
• Specify the script file used to determine the Freefloat Link One wedge mode.
• Using Default script.txt - The script file provided with Freefloat Link One is used. Only Keyboard mode may be
selected for the wedge when this script file is used. (default)
• Using RFTerm script.txt - The RFTerm script file is used. Either Keyboard or Subscriber/Block mode may be
selected for the wedge when this script file is used.
• Copy RFTerm script.txt - Selecting this option copies the RFTerm supplied script.txt over the currently used
script.txt file. If the copy fails, an error message is displayed.
To use the RFTerm script file:
1. Select the Copy RFTerm script.txt option.
2. Confirm that you wish to copy the file and select Start > Shutdown > Restart when propmted to reboot the RFTerm.
3. After the RFTerm has restarted, return to this screen and verify Using RFTerm script.txt is selected. If not, select it.
2 - 10
4. The Wedge Mode (see below) can now be changed as desired.
Wedge Mode
Note: Freefloat Link One Wedge is used on the Thor VM1 and Thor VM2 equipped with a Windows Embedded
Standard Operating System and all Marathon operating systems. This parameter has no effect on other devices.
Determines the mode for the Freefloat Link One wedge.
• Keyboard - Data from the integrated scanner is passed through the keyboard buffer. This is the only option available
if the default script.txt is selected. (default)
• Subscriber/Block - Data from the scanner is transmitted in subscriber/block mode. This method can be much faster
than keyboard mode. Using RFTerm script.txt must be selected first or an error is displayed and the remains in
Keyboard mode.
Spcl Settings
This feature is designed for Honeywell support debugging use only.
2 - 11
Options3
Allows the size and position of the RFTerm window to be specified. By default, RFTerm is displayed in a full window.
Note: This tab was previously labeled Win Size.
Note: There are no configurable options on this screen for devices equipped with a Windows Mobile, Windows XP, Windows 7,
Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard operating system. Window Size cannot be adjusted for these devices.
• From the application menu, select File > Settings.
• A Settings dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Options3 tab
By default, RFTerm is displayed in a full window (all four settings are 0). There is no error checking for the specified ranges
except:
• Valid entries for each parameter are 0 through 999
• The smallest window size is 60x60 pixels regardless of the specified values.
Parameters
Origin X
Specifies the number of pixels to the right of the left origin point to place the left edge of the RFTerm window. Valid
entries are 0 through 999. Default is 0.
2 - 12
Origin Y
Specifies the number of pixels below the top origin point to place the top edge of the RFTerm window. Valid entries are
0 through 999. Default is 0.
Width Reduction
Specifies the number of pixels to the left of the right side screen limit to place the right edge of the RFTerm window.
Valid entries are 0 through 999. Default is 0.
Height Reduction
Specifies the number of pixels above the bottom screen limit to place the bottom edge of the RFTerm window. Valid
entries are 0 through 999. Default is 0.
Virtual Keyboard
Dolphin 70e Black only.
Determines the format of the virtual keyboard to be displayed. In addition to the traditional Windows SIP, the Dolphin
70e Black supports several custom virtual keyboards:
•
•
•
•
•
•
None - Do not display a virtual keyboard
Num Left - Display a numeric only virtual keyboard on the left side of the screen
Num Right - Display a numeric only virtual keyboard on the left side of the screen
Qwerty - Display a QWERTY virtual keyboard
Emulator - Display an HX2-style virtual keyboard
SIP - Default. Display the standard Windows SIP.
Note: The host can also send commands to switch the virtual keyboard. See Virtual Keyboards (page 9-12).
VK Orientation
Dolphin 70e Black only.
Determines the orientation of the display:
•
•
•
•
0 Deg - Display is not rotated (portrait mode).
90 Deg - Display is rotated 90º (landscape mode).
180 Deg - Display is rotated 180º (portrait mode).
270 Deg - Display is rotated 270º (landscape mode).
Note: Display orientation can also be set outside of RFTerm using the Dolphin Power Tools.
2 - 13
Sounds
Sounds may be configured for various events.
The Alarm on Match Text only sounds when a form is sent to RFTerm from the host. Entering data or moving the cursor around
on the screen does not cause extra beeps when the alarm text remains unchanged. When the user exits and then returns to the
Alarm on Match Text menu, another beep will occur.
Note: Before selecting a user-installed sound or WAV file to be played on a mobile client, the appropriate WAV file or sound file
must be available in the mobile device operating system persistent folder on the storage card. This will ensure the WAV
file is saved instead of discarded when the device is rebooted.
If there is no WAV file in the folder, the text boxes are blank. When there is a WAV file in the folder, the Good Beep/Bad Beep
and Alarm Sound drop down boxes are preset with the default value <DEFAULT> until changed.
• From the application menu, select File > Settings.
• A Settings dialog box will be displayed.
• Choose the Sounds tab.
Note: The Good Sound pulldown list was previously labeled Good Beep. The Bad Sound pulldown list was previously labeled
Bad Beep. The Match Text / Sound Key textbox was previous labeled Alarm on Match Text. The Alarm on Match Text
textbox only accepts Match Text. It does not accept Sound Keys.
Parameters
Good Sound
Select the sound from the drop-down box to play when an event such as a good scan occurs. Valid entries are determined by the available WAV files, plus <NONE> (no sound) and <DEFAULT> (default Windows event sound). The
default is <DEFAULT>.
Note: Before enabling the Good Sound, verify that “Good Scan” sounds are disabled on the mobile client using the
device’s control panel applet (e.g., Volume and Sounds Properties and/or Scanner Properties). When Good
Scan sounds are enabled in RFTerm and on the mobile client, there may be double sounds emitted by the mobile
client during a “Good Beep” function.
Bad Sound
Select the sound from the drop-down box to play when an error such as a bad scan occurs. Valid entries are determined by the available WAV files, plus <NONE> (no sound) and <DEFAULT> (default Windows event sound). The
default is <DEFAULT>.
Note: Before enabling the Bad Sound verify that “Bad Scan” sounds are disabled on the mobile client using the client’s
Control Panel applet (e.g., Volume and Sounds Properties and/or Scanner Properties). When Bad Scan sounds
are enabled in RFTerm and on the mobile client, there may be double sounds emitted by the mobile client during
a “Bad Beep” function.
2 - 14
Beep on Error
When the Windows System Sound (Exclamation Point) is desired as the Bad Beep sound, the user must change
the WAV file associated with the Operating System on the mobile client (e.g. “Volume and Sounds”). See the
mobile client specific Reference Guide.
Alarm Sound
Select the sound from the drop-down box to play when a when text shown in “Match Text” is displayed. Valid entries
are determined by the available WAV files, plus <NONE> (no sound) and <DEFAULT> (default Windows event sound).
The default is <DEFAULT>.
Note: Before enabling the Alarm Sound Wav, verify that all sounds are disabled on the mobile client using the client’s
Control Panel applet (e.g., Volume and Sounds Properties). When Alarm Sounds are enabled in RFTerm and
on the mobile client, there may be double sounds emitted by the mobile client during an RFTerm Alarm function.
Match Text / Sound Key
Specify the Match Text or Sound Keys. Both may be specified in this textbox; however the Match Text must be specified first. See below for examples.
Match Text
Enter the text to be displayed on the user’s screen (for example, “Login”) when a response from the user is
desired. The default is blank.
After playing the Alarm Sound WAV and displaying the Match Text, RFTerm then waits for a user response.
Sound Key
Use Sound Key to map various sound causes to the three available sounds.
The Sound Key string is three characters:
The first character is $.
The second character is the cause of the sound:
M for Match
H for Host
U for User
S for Good Scan
L for Laser Error or Bad Scan.
The third character is the sound played:
G for Good Sound
B for Bad Sound
A for Alarm Sound.
Examples
$HA means to assign Host initiated sounds to the Alarm sound
$MA means to assign the Match string sound to the Alarm sound
$LB means to assign the Laser error (scan error) to the Bad sound
$SG means to assign the good Scan sound to Good sound
$UA means to assign User initiated sounds to the Alarm sound.
$HA$LB$SG - Multiple sounds can be assigned by entering Sound Keys consecutively.
Login$HA$MA$UA - Match Text can be used with Sound Keys as long as the Match Text comes before the
Sound Keys in the string.
2 - 15
Alarm Position
Enter the row and column starting position for the Alarm on Match Text to be displayed on the user’s screen. The
default is Row=0 Column=0.
The alarm sounds when it discovers the Alarm on Match Text at the specified row and column. The alarm does not
sound when the Alarm on Match Text is located at any other position.
Sound Events
Host initiated sounds can be triggered by:
• a TN5250/TN3270 message with the Alarm bit set
• a VT220 “bell” command
• a *B string
User initiated sounds are triggered by:
• the user moving the cursor outside a field and trying to enter data
• the user trying to enter a letter into a numeric only field
• the user trying to enter data during input inhibit.
2 - 16
Status
Status information is split into two categories.
Status icons that show connection information, the battery level and the state of the keyboard modifier keys may be displayed.
Status icons are not available on devices equipped with a Windows Mobile operating system.
A session menu can be displayed that shows all configured sessions.
Parameters
Status Icons
Orientation
Determines if the status icons are active and, if active, the orientation of the status display.
Valid options are:
•
•
•
•
•
None - Do not display the status icons
Horizontal - Display the status icons with a horizontal orientation
Vertical - Display the status icons with a vertical orientation
Large Horizontal - Display larger status icons with a horizontal orientation
Large Vertical - Display larger status icons with a vertical orientation.
The default is None (status icons not displayed).
Location
If enabled, determines the location of the status icons on the RFTerm screen. Valid options are:
•
•
•
•
Top-Left
Top-Right
Bottom-Left
Bottom-Right
The default is Bottom-Right.
Color
Determines if the status icons are displayed in color (default) or monotone. The examples below are the color
icons.
2 - 17
WAN
WWAN signal strength is indicated by a four bar icon with a W.
Excellent signal strength
Good signal strength
Fair signal strength
Poor signal strength
No signal
Con
Displays the status of the connection to the host.
No currently connected session
Session connected
WiFi
Signal strength for 802.11 radio is indicated by a four bar icon.
Excellent signal strength
Good signal strength
Fair signal strength
Poor signal strength
No signal
Bat
Battery power is indicated by a battery icon or a plug icon.
Excellent battery strength
Good battery strength
Fair battery strength
Poor battery strength
External power source connected
Key
The status of certain keypress states are indicated.
None of the states below are active.
The Alt keypress state is active
The Ctl keypress state is active
The Shift keypress state is active
The CapsLock (or CAPS) keypress state is active
2 - 18
Session Menu
The Session Menu parameters provide options for displaying and swapping between sessions.
Host Menu
When enabled, the Host Menu displays information on sessions on the RFTerm “idle” screen. The Host Menu can
also be displayed in front of an actively connected session by pressing [Ctrl][Alt][0]. When the Session Menu is
displayed, pressing keys 1 through 4 switches to that session:
• If the selected session is not connected, selecting the session starts that session. If the connection fails, the
Host Menu is displayed again.
• If the selected session is already connected, selecting returns the user back to that session.
When a session is selected, the Host Menu is dismissed. When a session is ended by a regular sign off, the Session Menu is automatically displayed, if enabled.
Information displayed, from left to right is:
• Active session indicator:
>> for active
__ for inactive
• Session ID, i.e. S1
• Connection status:
C for connected
_ for not connected
• Host Name, as entered on Session > Configure screen (optional)
• Host IP Address, as entered on Session > Configure screen
Session Start Control
Session Start Control is provided so the user has control over whether or not an auto login session starts.
When enabled, Session Start Control displays a confirmation box before starting the session selected from the
Host Menu. When the popup is displayed:
• Clicking OK or pressing Enter starts the session.
• Clicking the X or pressing ESC cancels the session start and returns the user to the Host Menu.
Since auto login sessions may start as soon as the session is selected. By providing the option to start or cancel
the session, the user is provided a rest-point where it is safe to switch off the device without having any open
When disabled, the auto login sessions start without the user having any input.
Logging
The logging feature is designed for Honeywell field service use only.
2 - 19
Com1 and Com2
Note: Com1 and Com2 tabs replace the previous Serial Data tab. With the Com1 and Com2 tabs, each COM port can be
independently configured,
The options for Com1 and Com2 are the same.
• From the application menu, select File > Settings.
• A Settings dialog box will be displayed.
• Choose the Com1 or Com2 tab.
Should RFTerm be unable to apply any of the COM Port settings, a popup dialog will appear., such as the one below:
COM ports available are dependent on the configuration of the mobile device.
Parameters
Usage
Select the desired communication configuration for the selected COM port:
• Input - The COM port is configured for input only (default).
• I/O - The COM port is configured for bi-directional communications
• In/Print - The COM port is configured for input and the print settings are controlled from the dialog box displayed by
selecting File > Print Setup > Direct Serial (page 4-6).
• Off - The COM port is disabled.
Baud Rate
Specifies the baud rate at which the COM port operates. The default is 9600.
Data Bits
Specifies the number of data bits to be used. It is one of the following values: 7, or 8 (default).
Timeout
Specifies port timeout in seconds. The default is 10.
2 - 20
Parity
Specifies the parity scheme to be used. It is one of the following values: even, mark, none (default), odd and space.
Stop Bits
Specifies the number of stop bits to be used. It is one of the following values: 1 (default), or 2.
DTR Control
Specifies the data-terminal-ready flow control. The options are enable (default), disable and handshake.
RTS Control
Specifies the request-to-send flow control. The options are enable (default), disable, handshake and toggle.
CTS Out
Specifies if the CTS (clear-to-send) signal is monitored for output flow control. The default is disabled (unchecked).
DSR Out
Specifies if the DSR (data-set-ready) signal is monitored for output flow control. The default is disabled (unchecked).
XonXoff Xmit
Specifies if XON/XOFF flow control is used during transmission. The default is enabled (checked).
XonXoff Recv
Specifies if XON/XOFF flow control is used during reception. The default is enabled (checked).
Stored Forms
A stored form is a combination of valid ANSI/DEC/LXE commands and text that, when executed by RFTerm and displayed on
the screen, appears as a fill-in form.
For all devices with a Windows CE, Windows Embedded Compact, or Windows Mobile operating system
RFTerm places the commands and text that comprise the form in the System/LXE/RFTerm/Stored Forms folder.
For all devices with a Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard operating system
RFTerm places the commands and text that comprise the form in the Windows/LXE/Stored Forms folder.
Creating Stored Forms
Stored forms are written by the host application programmer and sent from the host to the mobile client. You cannot create
a form from the mobile client.
The maximum number of stored forms supported by RFTerm is 100 and the maximum size of each stored form is 2K. The
/Stored Forms folder is not automatically cleared upon a mobile client cold boot.
See also: Forms (page 6-3) for command codes for stored forms.
2 - 21
2 - 22
3
Session Configuration
This section describes various configuration parameters for setting host connections. All these parameters may be set using
the application configuration dialogs accessed from the Session > Configure application menu. Except for “Connection”
parameters, you can change or update any other parameters at any time, whether the host session is connected or disconnected.
All configuration attributes are associated with the currently active session. Every session can have a different set of configuration attributes.
!
For Microsoft Windows 7, Windows 10, and Windows Embedded 7:
It is necessary to run to run RFTerm as an administrator when modifying these settings because RFTerm must be able to
access and make changes to the Windows registry.
Rather than selecting to run as administrator each time, right click on the RFTerm icon and select Properties. Tap the
Compatibility tab and check Run this program as an administrator. This modification affects the current user only unless Change settings for all users is tapped before changing the privilege level.
Connection
The following figures show the Connection tab of the host session configuration dialog.
3-1
Note: The dialogs dynamically change depending upon the current selection of “Host Type”.
1. From the application menu, Select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
2. A Configure dialog box is displayed.
3. Choose the Connection tab.
Prerequisites for Connection
Before you make a host connection, you will, at a minimum, need to know:
• the alias name or IP address and
• the port number of the host system
to properly set up your host session.
Note: There are several new tabs available on the Sessions > Configure screen.
Parameters
Host Type
This is the terminal emulation type required by the host. Your choices are 3270, or VT220. You may select only one
emulation type for the session. Other connection options may change depending upon the host emulation type
selected.
Host Address
This is the address of a host system or an intermediate gateway managing connections to the host system. Enter
either the numeric IP address or the alias name, using up to 64 characters. This option is case-sensitive.
Host Name
Host name is a field used to identify the session in the Session Menu. Host name is comprised of alphanumeric characters. No host name resolving is performed.
Terminal Device
This is the client type string that determines the specific client to emulate. For 3270 emulations only model 2 screen
geometry is supported. VT220 supports VT52, VT100 and VT220 terminal types. Each host emulation type has its
own default terminal type.
Telnet Port
This is the TCP socket port number to be used to connect to the host system. The default is 23. The range is between
0 and 65535.
3-2
Reset Defaults
Tap this button to reset all parameters for the selected session to their default values.
3270, 5250, VT Config
VT Configuration (page 3-4)
5250 Configuration (page 3-12)
3270 Configuration (page 3-17)
This button, which changes with the Host Type selection, opens a configuration dialog for 3270, 5250 or VT emulation
settings.
KeepAlive
Checking the KeepAlive box will send a message to the host every 2 hours (approximately). If the host responds,
RFTerm knows the host is still present and will keep the socket open. If the host does not respond to repeated KeepAlive messages, RFTerm will close the connection to the host. The KeepAlive Interval default value is approximately 2
hours.
By default, KeepAlive is enabled.
Auto Reconnect
Checking this box will cause RFTerm to automatically attempt to reconnect to the host should the connection be terminated by the user or the host, other than signal loss.
Retry on Signal Loss
This option enables an automatic reconnection attempt for this session should the signal be lost. This option is valid
for both RF (802.11) and WWAN connections to the host
3-3
VT Configuration
Keys
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
Choose the Connection tab.
Select VT220 as the Host Type, press the VT Config button.
Choose the Keys tab.
Parameters
Backspace
When in character mode, this option configures the backspace key to send either the Delete character or the
Backspace character. The default is Send Delete character.
Enter Key
This option configures the Enter key to send either a carriage return or a carriage return and line feed. The
default is Send Carriage Return.
Keyboard
Specifies the international ASCII character set for use with the VT220 emulation. The default is North American.
3-4
Screen
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
Choose the Connection tab.
Select VT220 as the Host Type, press the VT Config button.
Choose the Screen tab.
Parameters
Background
This option controls the background shade for VT host sessions. The default is Dark.
Columns
This option specifies the number of columns to be set for the VT host session to be 80 or 132. The default
column value is 80 columns. See also: Answerback Columns (page 3-9).
Local Echo
Use this option to select the local echo mode (when in character mode). The default is Off.
• Off - Local echo is off
• On - Local echo is on. Typed text is echoed locally on the mobile client.
• On CR - Local echo is on. Typed text is echoed locally on the mobile client. CR is added to incoming LF.
Note: previous versions had a Local Echo checkbox which enabled local echo when checked.
Autowrap
Check this option to enable automatic wrapping of text once it reaches the maximum column width. The
default is Enabled (checked).
LF Option
Use this option to control the handling line feed (LF) handling. The default is Normal.
• Normal - No special handling is performed.
• LFisCRLF - LF is converted to CRLF is the LF is not already paired with a CR.
Screen Update
Controls the fast screen update enhancement.
•
•
•
•
•
Normal - rapid (fast) update enhancements are used. This is the default.
Rapid 1 - Half second timer for last update, packet count of 3 to begin fast update
Rapid 2 - Half second timer for last update, packet count of 5 to begin fast update
Rapid 3 - One second timer for last update, packet count of 3 to begin fast update
Rapid 4 - One second timer for last update, packet count of 5 to begin fast update
3-5
Options
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
Choose the Connection tab.
Select VT220 as the Host Type, press the VT Config button.
Choose the Options tab.
Parameters
C1 Controls
The C1 Controls option allows the user to select 7 bit or 8 bit ASCII control sequences for the host session.
The default is Send 7-bit.
User Preference Supplemental
This is the user preferred supplemental character set. The default is DEC.
Auto Transmit
Checking this box will cause the entire screen to be sent to the host after the user exits the last field on the
screen. Before sending the data, the Auto Transmit function evaluates the final cursor movement. If the final
cursor movement was caused by a backspace or backtab, the screen is not sent to the host. Note that arrow
keys have no effect on Auto Transmit. The default is blank.
Inclusive End Prot Area
When checked, the End Of Protected Area command is inclusive when a second field exists on the screen, so
that the last location does not become unprotected. The default is unchecked.
3-6
Send/Receive Mode
The default is Character.
• Always Block - RFTerm will remain in Block mode during and after logon. The host can override the
current mode.
• Always Character - RFTerm will remain in Character mode during and after logon. The host can override
the current mode.
• Always Line - RFTerm will remain in Line mode during and after logon. The host can override the current
mode.
• Block - RFTerm starts in Character mode until a logon connection occurs, and then it remains in Block
mode. The host can override the current mode. A function key press performs an Autosend.
• Character - RFTerm starts in Character mode until a logon connection occurs, and then it remains in
Character mode. The host can override the current mode.
• Key Buf Char - Character mode with a buffer. The buffer captures incoming messages and forwards them
for processing. If a character fails to be processed, the buffer reattempts processing the buffer contents.
• Line - RFTerm starts in Character mode until a logon connection occurs, and then it remains in Line mode.
The host can override the current mode. A function key press performs an Autosend.
3-7
Answerback
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
Choose the Connection tab.
Select VT220 as the Host Type, press the VT Config button.
Choose the Answerback tab.
Parameters
Use LXE Format
When this parameter is enabled (checked), the following options to modify the Honeywell formatted string are
available and the Answerback string cannot be directly edited.
When this parameter is disabled (blank), the user can edit the Answerback string as described in Answerback
Message (page 3-9). Other parameters on this dialog box cannot be edited (dimmed). Use IP Address and
Zero Pad are Enabled by default.
Use Secondary ID
Secondary ID and IP Address are mutually exclusive. Checking one disables the controls for the other. The
default Secondary ID is 4 zeros “0000” in alphanumeric format. This is an alternate method to identify the client with a 4-digit number. It is automatically padded with zeros if it contains fewer than 4 characters.
Honeywell Session Management
To use RFTerm with any of the Honeywell Session Management products, the Answerback string must be formatted to include a Secondary ID.
Special Formatting
Special formatting characters are available to insert device specific ID components into the Secondary ID portion of the answerback string. Refer to Special Formatting for Answerback String (page 3-9) for details.
Use IP Address
Instructs RFTerm to use the IP Address of the device in the Answerback string. This parameter is disabled
when Use Honeywell Format and Use Secondary ID are enabled. This is the default.
Zero Pad
When Zero Pad is enabled (checked), any of the four numbers in the IP address less than 100 will be padded
with leading zeros. For example, with Zero Pad disabled (blank), an IP address is generated as 1.16.253.42.
With Zero Pad enabled, the IP address is generated as 001.016.253.042.
3-8
Row
The default is Full Screen.
• None - When selected, sends nothing for the row field in the Answerback string.
• Full Screen - When selected, sends 24 for rows in the Answerback string.
• Specify - Allows the row information to be set according to the customer’s needs. Two characters
maximum.
Columns
The default is None.
• None - When selected, sends nothing for the column field in the Answerback string.
• Full Screen - The setting established in the Columns parameter (80 or 132) on the VT Configuration >
Screen tab sets the column size for the Answerback string.
• Specify - Refer to VT Configuration > Screen > Columns parameter. Allows the column size, based on
the setting in the Columns parameter, to be adjusted according to the customer’s needs. Three characters
maximum.
See also: Screen > Columns (page 3-5).
Display
The user may press this button at any time to view the answerback string with the selected options.
Note: The string cannot be edited by the user when Use LXE Format is enabled (checked).
Answerback Message
Host applications may query the VT client for a text message answerback response. This response may be
used to identify the client. The answerback string is automatically generated when requested by the host
using the ENQ command, or by pressing the Display button. The default format contains the following items
after LXE/q/:
• The number of rows currently visible on the screen.
• The current release number of RFTerm, same as in the About Box.
• The IP address of the device, or an optional secondary ID. The default uses the IP address.
• Optionally, the number of columns currently visible on the screen.
If Use LXE Format is unchecked, the Answerback Message is an entry field.
Special formatting characters are available to insert device specific ID components into the answerback
string. See below for details.
Special Formatting for Answerback String
The user can enter the % character in either the Secondary ID textbox (when the LXE format is enabled) or
directly in the Answerback Message textbox (when the LXE formatting is disabled) to indicate how to retrieve and
format the portion of the data source to be included in the Answerback string.
The % is followed by a string of special characters in the format %vwwyyz
Where:
v must be one of the following values:
v value
Result
0
The string is zero padded.
<space>
The string is space padded.
:
The next character is not to be formatted and is copied without processing into the string. Special
formatting resumes if another % symbol is encountered in the string.
;
Formatting is stopped for the remainder of the string. In this case, the initial “%” and the “;”
characters are deleted from the string and all other characters are shifted to the left.
ww is the two digit minimum display width.
yy is the two digit precision, the number of digits to display.
3-9
• If the minimum display width (ww) is greater than the precision (yy) then the string is padded with either zeros
or spaces (depending on the value for v).
• When counting digits of precision (yy), only the actual hexadecimal digits are counted. Delimiters such as the
period (in an IP or MAC address) or the dash (GUID) are not counted as digits of precision and are not displayed
in the result.
• If the selected precision (yy) is greater than the minimum display width (ww) and the selected precision is less
than the available digits in the ID selected, the number of digits returned is the digits of precision.
• If the selected precision (yy) is greater than the minimum display width (ww) and the selected precision is
greater than the available digits in the ID selected, the number of digits returned is the greater of the available
digits or the minimum display width.
• The maximum value is 31 for display width (ww) and digits of precision (yy).
z must be one of the following values:
z value
Result
I
Indicates the device’s IP address is used to identify the device. If the IP address is not available, a
string of padding characters results.
G
Indicates the GUID is used to identify the device. The conversion beings with the rightmost
character of the GUID and counts to the left. If a GUID is not available from the operating system,
RFTerm generates and stores the GUID in a non-volatile location eliminating the need to generate
the GUID more than once.
M
Indicates the MAC address is used to identify the device. The conversion begins with the rightmost
character of the MAC address and moves to the left. Colons are ignored during the conversion. If
the MAC address is not available, a string of padding characters results.
T
Indicates the Wavelink Avalanche TID is used to identify the device. If the TID is not available, a
string of padding characters results.
Note: If the above rules are broken (ww or yy are not two digits, y is an invalid value, etc.) the special formatting
is abandoned and the string is filled with *ERROR*.
Examples
Refer to the following examples for a device with IP address: 10.10.1.23, GUID: 415B1AF5-561F-373D-A24480250E3CA123, MAC address: 00:0F:F8:01:23:45 and no Wavelink TID assigned to the device:
3 - 10
String Entered
Resolves to
ABC%00808I
ABC01010123
ABC% 0808I
ABC 1010123
ABC%00804I
ABC00000123
ABC%00408I
ABC1010123
ABC%00301I
ABC003
ABC%01012I
ABC0001010123
ABC%00404G
ABCA123
ABC%00303M
ABC345
ABC%00404T
ABC0000
ABC%0404T
*ERROR*
ABC%;XYZ
ABCXYZ
ABC%;%X%Y%Z
ABC%X%Y%Z
%:%ABC%00303I
%ABC123
ABC%:%% 0303I
ABC% 23
Compatibility
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
Choose the Connection tab.
Select VT220 as the Host Type, press the VT Config button.
Choose the Compatibility tab.
Parameters
SEM (Select Editing Extent Mode for VT220)
The session will use the default SEM assignment unless it is overridden by the host. The default is 0 (display).
Valid values are: 0 = display, 1 = row, 2 = field, 3 = area.
Select DEC Special Graphics into G1
The default is Disabled (unchecked). This option, when enabled, forces the mobile device to be in graphics
mode at all times.
Unlock Keyboard Before End of Data Stream
When unchecked (disabled), the keyboard is locked until the end of the data stream is processed. This is the
default behavior.
When checked (enabled), the keyboard is not locked while the data stream is processed.
Clear Tabs on Clear Screen
Determines if tabs will be cleared when the clear screen command “ESC[2J” is used. The default is None.
Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
None - Does not clear any preset tabs.
Cursor Only - Clears only the preset cursor tabs.
Column Only - Clears only the preset column tabs.
Cursor and Col - Clears both cursor and column preset tabs.
3 - 11
5250 Configuration
Options
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
Choose the Connection tab.
Select 5250 as the Host Type, press the 5250 Config button.
Choose the Options tab.
Parameters
Device / LU#
This is an optional IBM parameter. It represents a dedicated LU number or name on the server that you might
want to connect through. Default is blank.
Special Formatting
Special formatting characters are available to insert device specific ID components into the Device / LU#
string. Refer to Special Formatting for Device / LU# String (page 3-13).
Auto Transmit
This selection determines the auto transmit behavior of RFTerm.
• Off - Auto transmit is disabled. This is the default.
• Last field & pos - This option causes the entire screen to be sent to the host based on data being entered
into the last field and the last position of the field, thereby causing a field exit. The Auto Transmit function
evaluates the final cursor movement. If the final cursor movement was caused by a backspace or backtab,
the screen is not sent to the host. Note that arrow keys have no effect on Auto Transmit.
• Last field & exit - This option causes the entire screen to be sent to the host based on the occurrence of
a field exit data in the last field.
• Scan last field - This option causes the entire screen to be sent to the host when data is scanned into the
last field. The data does not have to fill the field to trigger the transmit.
Note: This parameter was previously a check box. Auto transmit was either disabled (unchecked) or enabled
for transmit on last field and position (checked).
Tab = Field Exit
Determines the behavior of the Tab key:
•
•
•
•
3 - 12
None - Tab does not behave as Field Exit.
Field Exit - Tab behaves has field exit except when in a signed numeric field.
Field Exit Signed Only - Tab behaves has field exit when in a signed numeric field
Field Plus Signed Only - Tab behaves has field plus when in a signed numeric field
Status Line Visible
When Status Line Visible is checked, the status line is displayed on the last viewable row of the mobile client’s
screen. Default is blank.
Support ANSI Login
Checking this box will enable the 5250 session to perform as a limited VT emulation until an IBM terminal type
is negotiated with the host. Default is blank.
Auto Enter
When Auto Enter is checked, an Enter command is sent to the host after a print. Default is blank.
Field Exit on Scan
When Field Exit on Scan is checked, RFTerm performs a Field Exit automatically if a field is being exited due
to a bar code scan. Default is blank.
Special Formatting for Device / LU# String
The user can enter the % character in the Device / LU# textbox to indicate how to retrieve and format the portion
of the data source to be included in the Device / LU# string.
The % is followed by a string of special characters in the format %vwwyyz
Where:
v must be one of the following values:
v value
Result
0
The string is zero padded.
<space>
The string is space padded.
:
The next character is not to be formatted and is copied without processing into the string. Special
formatting resumes if another % symbol is encountered in the string.
;
Formatting is stopped for the remainder of the string. In this case, the initial “%” and the “;”
characters are deleted from the string and all other characters are shifted to the left.
ww is the two digit minimum display width.
yy is the two digit precision, the number of digits to display.
• If the minimum display width (ww) is greater than the precision (yy) then the string is padded with either zeros
or spaces (depending on the value for v).
• When counting digits of precision (yy), only the actual hexadecimal digits are counted. Delimiters such as the
period (in an IP or MAC address) or the dash (GUID) are not counted as digits of precision and are not displayed
in the result.
• If the selected precision (yy) is greater than the minimum display width (ww) and the selected precision is less
than the available digits in the ID selected, the number of digits returned is the digits of precision.
• If the selected precision (yy) is greater than the minimum display width (ww) and the selected precision is
greater than the available digits in the ID selected, the number of digits returned is the greater of the available
digits or the minimum display width.
• The maximum value is 31 for display width (ww) and digits of precision (yy).
z must be one of the following values:
z value
Result
I
Indicates the device’s IP address is used to identify the device. If the IP address is not available, a
string of padding characters results.
G
Indicates the GUID is used to identify the device. The conversion beings with the rightmost
character of the GUID and counts to the left. If a GUID is not available from the operating system,
RFTerm generates and stores the GUID in a non-volatile location eliminating the need to generate
the GUID more than once.
3 - 13
z value
Result
M
Indicates the MAC address is used to identify the device. The conversion begins with the rightmost
character of the MAC address and moves to the left. Colons are ignored during the conversion. If
the MAC address is not available, a string of padding characters results.
T
Indicates the Wavelink Avalanche TID is used to identify the device. If the TID is not available, a
string of padding characters results.
Note: If the above rules are broken (ww or yy are not two digits, y is an invalid value, etc.) the special formatting
is abandoned and the string is filled with *ERROR*.
Examples
Refer to the following examples for a device with IP address: 10.10.1.23, GUID: 415B1AF5-561F-373D-A24480250E3CA123, MAC address: 00:0F:F8:01:23:45 and no Wavelink TID assigned to the device:
3 - 14
String Entered
Resolves to
ABC%00808I
ABC01010123
ABC% 0808I
ABC 1010123
ABC%00804I
ABC00000123
ABC%00408I
ABC1010123
ABC%00301I
ABC003
ABC%01012I
ABC0001010123
ABC%00404G
ABCA123
ABC%00303M
ABC345
ABC%00404T
ABC0000
ABC%0404T
*ERROR*
ABC%;XYZ
ABCXYZ
ABC%;%X%Y%Z
ABC%X%Y%Z
%:%ABC%00303I
%ABC123
ABC%:%% 0303I
ABC% 23
Compatibility
Note: Previous versions had a Scanner Always On option. This function has been replaced by the Scan Control
option on the Barcode (page 3-24) tab.
Note: Previous versions had a Auto Clear Field checkbox. This has been replaced by a pulldown list.
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
Choose the Connection tab.
Select 5250 as the Host Type, press the 5250 Config button.
Choose the Compatibility tab.
Parameters
Block PF key Inhibit
Enable (check) this checkbox to allow all 5250 PF keys to send. Disable (blank) to block PF key inhibit and
data will not be sent when a PF key is pressed.
The default is disabled.
Block Negative Response for Message Buffer in Use
Enable (check) this checkbox to block a negative response from being sent to the host when the mobile client
message buffer is in use at the same time the host sends a command. The default is disabled (blank).
For example, a write to display command is received from the host but the mobile client buffer is being used
for a message, so RFTerm sends back a negative response. The host interprets the response as user data.
Auto Clear Field
Select the desired option for auto clearing of the input field when the user moves the cursor to a field.
• No - The field is not cleared.
• Yes - The field is cleared when the user enters data (default).
• Yes except arrow - The field is cleared when the user enters data, however if the previous keypress was
an arrow key, the field is not cleared.
Block Send Data Aid Invite
If not checked (default), the invite and pending read are set for the Send Data Aid.
If checked (blocked) then the invite and pending read are not set for Send Data Aid.
The default is disabled (not checked).
3 - 15
Reject On Restore Screen
When checked, RFTerm executes a CmdClearUnit command to clear the screen when a CmdRestoreScreen
is received.
The default is unchecked, the CmdClearUnit is not executed on CmdRestoreScreen.
Cursor Home
Determines the behavior for cursor home. The default is Default.
Valid options are
•
•
•
•
3 - 16
Default - Cursor is not repositioned.
Next - Locates the cursor to the next field location.
Current - Locates the cursor at the current field position.
Home - Locates the cursor at the origin position (upper left corner).
3270 Configuration
Options
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
Choose the Connection tab.
Select 3270 as the Host Type, press the 3270 Config button.
Choose the Options tab.
Parameters
Device / LU#
This is an optional IBM parameter. It represents a dedicated LU number or name on the server that you might
want to connect through. Default is blank.
Special Formatting
Special formatting characters are available to insert device specific ID components into the Device / LU#
string. Refer tp Special Formatting for Device / LU# String (page 3-18).
EAB
This is an optional 3270 terminal emulation parameter. If checked, this will allocate an Enhanced Attribute
Buffer. EAB support allows for advanced display features such as color and highlighting. Default is Enabled.
Auto Transmit
Checking this box will cause the entire screen to be sent to the host after the user exits the last field on the
screen. Before sending the data, the Auto Transmit function evaluates the final cursor movement. If the final
cursor movement was caused by a backspace or backtab, the screen is not sent to the host. Note that arrow
keys have no effect on Auto Transmit. Default is blank.
Status Line Visible
When Status Line Visible is checked, the status line is displayed on the last viewable row of the mobile client’s
screen. Default is blank.
Auto Enter
When Auto Enter is checked, all data will be sent to the host when all fields are completed. Valid for Block
and Line mode. Default is blank.
Support TN3270E
When Support TN3270E is enabled, only Basic TN3270E (as defined in Section 9 of RFC 2355) host
requests are supported. The default value is “checked” or enabled. Note that Full 3270E is not supported by
RFTerm. Default is Enabled.
3 - 17
Special Formatting for Device / LU# String
The user can enter the % character in the Device / LU# textbox to indicate how to retrieve and format the portion
of the data source to be included in the Device / LU# string.
The % is followed by a string of special characters in the format %vwwyyz
Where:
v must be one of the following values:
v value
Result
0
The string is zero padded.
<space>
The string is space padded.
:
The next character is not to be formatted and is copied without processing into the string. Special
formatting resumes if another % symbol is encountered in the string.
;
Formatting is stopped for the remainder of the string. In this case, the initial “%” and the “;”
characters are deleted from the string and all other characters are shifted to the left.
ww is the two digit minimum display width.
yy is the two digit precision, the number of digits to display.
• If the minimum display width (ww) is greater than the precision (yy) then the string is padded with either zeros
or spaces (depending on the value for v).
• When counting digits of precision (yy), only the actual hexadecimal digits are counted. Delimiters such as the
period (in an IP or MAC address) or the dash (GUID) are not counted as digits of precision and are not displayed
in the result.
• If the selected precision (yy) is greater than the minimum display width (ww) and the selected precision is less
than the available digits in the ID selected, the number of digits returned is the digits of precision.
• If the selected precision (yy) is greater than the minimum display width (ww) and the selected precision is
greater than the available digits in the ID selected, the number of digits returned is the greater of the available
digits or the minimum display width.
• The maximum value is 31 for display width (ww) and digits of precision (yy).
z must be one of the following values:
z value
Result
I
Indicates the device’s IP address is used to identify the device. If the IP address is not available, a
string of padding characters results.
G
Indicates the GUID is used to identify the device. The conversion beings with the rightmost
character of the GUID and counts to the left. If a GUID is not available from the operating system,
RFTerm generates and stores the GUID in a non-volatile location eliminating the need to generate
the GUID more than once.
M
Indicates the MAC address is used to identify the device. The conversion begins with the rightmost
character of the MAC address and moves to the left. Colons are ignored during the conversion. If
the MAC address is not available, a string of padding characters results.
T
Indicates the Wavelink Avalanche TID is used to identify the device. If the TID is not available, a
string of padding characters results.
Note: If the above rules are broken (ww or yy are not two digits, y is an invalid value, etc.) the special formatting
is abandoned and the string is filled with *ERROR*.
3 - 18
Examples
Refer to the following examples for a device with IP address: 10.10.1.23, GUID: 415B1AF5-561F-373D-A24480250E3CA123, MAC address: 00:0F:F8:01:23:45 and no Wavelink TID assigned to the device:
String Entered
Resolves to
ABC%00808I
ABC01010123
ABC% 0808I
ABC 1010123
ABC%00804I
ABC00000123
ABC%00408I
ABC1010123
ABC%00301I
ABC003
ABC%01012I
ABC0001010123
ABC%00404G
ABCA123
ABC%00303M
ABC345
ABC%00404T
ABC0000
ABC%0404T
*ERROR*
ABC%;XYZ
ABCXYZ
ABC%;%X%Y%Z
ABC%X%Y%Z
%:%ABC%00303I
%ABC123
ABC%:%% 0303I
ABC% 23
3 - 19
Compatibility
Note: Previous versions had a Scanner Always On option. This function has been replaced by the Scan Control
option on the Barcode (page 3-24) tab.
Note: Previous versions had a Auto Clear Field checkbox. This has been replaced by a pulldown list.
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
Choose the Connection tab.
Select 3270 as the Host Type, press the 3270 Config button.
Choose the Compatibility tab.
Parameters
Clear to EOL
The default value is Disabled (unchecked). Enable (check) this parameter to force the RFTerm 3270 TE to
clear displayable text to the end of line or to the end of field attribute when writing displayable text from the
host. Hidden attributes are removed.
Auto Clear Field
Select the desired option for auto clearing of the input field when the user moves the cursor to a field.
• No - The field is not cleared.
• Yes - The field is cleared when the user enters data (default).
• Yes except arrow - The field is cleared when the user enters data, however if the previous keypress was
an arrow key, the field is not cleared.
Order Prog Tab Erase
Determines if the 3270 screen is erased upon an error notification from the host:
• Normal - The erase does not occur for the Order Program Tab command (default).
• Erase - The erase does occur for the Order Program Tab command.
Null Format Control Order
This option determines how to handle a Null Format Control Order:
• Process - The beginning character in a field is erased after entering data and pressing send (default).
• Ignore - Prevents the erasing of the initial character in the field.
3 - 20
Font
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
• A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
• Choose the Font tab.
The default font is “Courier New” and the default style is “Normal”. The default font may change based on the operating system
and installed fonts on the mobile client.
Parameters
Font
The drop down box contains the name of a fixed-width True Type font that is used to display the text on the screen.
The fonts listed are pre-installed in the mobile client or installed by the end-user. RFTerm supports double byte fonts.
For more information on installed fonts, see the equipment specific reference guide.
Style
This is the weight setting of the selected font. Available weights are: Default, Thin, Light, Normal, Medium, Bold,
XBold, Heavy. The default is Normal.
Pointsize
Allows the pointsize of the selected font to be specified. The default is 10, valid values are from 6 to 72. If the Specify
Rows and Columns checkbox is checked, Pointsize is calculated by RFTerm and this control is disabled (grayed out).
Specify Rows and Columns
The default is disabled (unchecked). Select this option to specify the rows and columns to fit the display using the
Rows: and Cols: boxes. Using the specified rows and columns, RFTerm calculates the pointsize for the fonts. When
this option is selected, the Pointsize control is disabled.
3 - 21
Colors
Traditional Windows color scheme is the default. Predefined color schemes are available to enhance visual readability of the
display text on the mobile client. Further, mobile clients may be used in different lighting environments.
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
• A Configure dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Colors tab
In addition to predefined color schemes, a “Custom” color scheme may be used to configure various display attributes to suit the
user’s personal preferences.
Parameters
Scheme
To select a predefined color scheme, choose one from the Scheme drop down box. The sample box will change to
reflect the current selected attribute foreground and background colors. The following pre-defined color schemes are
available.
•
•
•
•
•
Traditional - This is the traditional IBM terminal “green screen” color scheme.
Black on White - Used primarily on devices with monochrome LCD displays.
White on Black - Inverse of black on white.
Factory - This color scheme is optimized for factory lighting and color displays.
Custom - This scheme allows the user to alter various attributes.
Attribute
This is a list of mobile client display attributes, including Bold, for which colors may be changed as part of creating a
Custom color scheme.
Sample Attribute
This is a sample box that shows the foreground and background color of the currently selected attribute.
Intense
This check box, when selected, applies the custom color to the Intense version of the selected attribute. This option
applies to 3270 emulations.
3 - 22
Select Color
This button invokes the Color dialog to select a color for an attribute.
Custom Color Scheme
To create a custom color scheme, select the attribute from the attribute list box.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Choose the attribute, whose color is to be changed.
Tap the Select Color... button.
The Color dialog appears.
Select the desired color for the attribute. Click OK.
The Sample box will change to reflect the newly selected color.
For updating colors associated with the Intense mode of an attribute, check the Intense box then select the desired
color.
3 - 23
Barcode
Bar code scanner options are provided for easy manipulation of data streams input through the serial port.
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
• A Configure dialog box will be displayed.
• Choose the Barcode tab.
For devices with a Windows CE or Windows Mobile operating system
Additional bar code manipulation features are available using the Honeywell Scanner Wedge or DC Wedge for Windows
CE and Windows Mobile based devices. Refer to your device reference guide for additional details. If bar code manipulation is defined in both the Scanner or DC Wedge and in RFTerm, the actions defined in the Scanner or DC Wedge are executed first, followed by actions defined in RFTerm. Honeywell recommends using the Scanner/DC Wedge for bar code
manipulation unless emulation-specific actions are required.
Thor VM1 and Thor VM2 with Windows Embedded Standard Operating System
• RFTerm cannot perform the advanced bar code processing on this tab. Instead use Freefloat Link*One to process the
bar code data. Information on using Link*One can be found at www.freefloat.com.
• Configure Link*One for the serial or Bluetooth bar code scanner.
• RFTerm must be configured to NOT use the same COM port as specified in Link*One.
Thor VX8 and Thor VX9
• RFTerm cannot perform the advanced bar code processing on this tab. Instead use WLinq to process the bar code data.
Information on using WLInq is included in the Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 reference guides.
• RFTerm must be configured to NOT use the same Usage (page 2-20) as specified in WLinq.
• Configure WLinq for the serial or Bluetooth bar code scanner.
Thor VM3
Use Enterprise Settings to configure bar code processing. See the Thor VM3 User’s Guide for details.
Parameters
Left Justify
When checked, the Left Justify option shifts the cursor to the leftmost position of the current input field before any serial
input data is displayed on the screen.
Truncate
The Truncate option instructs RFTerm to discard any serial input data that would be beyond the end of the current field.
3 - 24
Clear Data
The Clear Data option automatically erases all data from the current cursor location to the end of the current field
before any serial input data is displayed.
Auto Advance
When checked, the Auto Advance option automatically moves the cursor to the beginning of the next input field after
displaying all data input through the serial port.
Fast Scan
When unchecked, there is a 200 millisecond delay to allow the scanner to interpret and forward data and for the scanner wedge to place the data into the buffer and notify RFTerm the data is available. This is the default.
If a user performs multiple rapid scans, and subsequent scans are performed before the 200 millisecond delay has
expired, some scans may be dropped. Check this option to reduce the delay to 10 milliseconds.
Use Field Exit
The Use Field Exit feature is only available for 5250 emulations and only when the Auto Advance box is checked.
Checking both boxes will cause RFTerm to append Field Exit to the scanned bar code.
Scan Control
This option allows the behavior of the scanner to be configured during Input Inhibit or keyboard lock.
The valid options are:
• PowOff1&3 - Power is shut off to COM ports 1 and 3 during Input Inhibit or keyboard lock. This option is the default.
• PowOn1&3 - Power is not shut off to COM ports 1 and 3 during Input Inhibit or keyboard lock.
• Disable1 - Power is shut off to COM ports 1 and 3 during Input Inhibit or keyboard lock and the LS3408 scanner
attached to COM1 is disabled (see note below).
• Disable3 - Power is shut off to COM ports 1 and 3 during Input Inhibit or keyboard lock and the LS3408 scanner
attached to COM1 is disabled (see note below.
Note: Disable1 and Disable3 may require an upgrade to your computer's software load and a firmware update for the
LS3408 scanner.
Barcode Preamble
This option will automatically insert the requested data at the head of the incoming data stream before it is displayed.
Control characters and characters not accessible from the keyboard can be represented using Hat Encoding (page 67).
Barcode Postamble
This option will automatically insert the requested data at the tail of the incoming data stream before it is displayed.
Control characters and characters not accessible from the keyboard can be represented using Hat Encoding (page 67).
Send Key
When checked, the Send Key option allows for a designated character in a bar code scan to automatically send an
[Enter] command, provided it is the last printable character in the bar code.
3 - 25
Character Mapping
The Character Mapping option is used to setup a non-printable character to be incorporated into a bar code and interpreted by RFTerm as one of 16 predefined actions.
Character mappings are unique to each session, persistent when RFTerm is closed and reset if a client session setting
is reset to its Default values. The default value for all programmable key codes is Accept.
For example, to map NULL to a Tab, click the down arrow in the Character text box. Select NULL. Click the down
arrow in the Action text box. Select Tab. Click the Add button. The mapping list changes to show NULL mapped to
Tab.
Options available from the Action drop down menu are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3 - 26
Accept
NULL
Backspace
Tab
Line Feed
Vertical Tab
Form Feed
Carriage Return
Data Link Escape
File Separator
Group Separator
Record Separator
Unit Separator
Enter (Send)
Space
Ignore (Drop)
Character Stripping
Default values are Code ID = *, Pre-Strip = 0 and Post-Strip = 0. The asterisk (*) is a wildcard character. Click the OK
button to save any changes/additions. Click the Cancel button or the X button to ignore any changes made.
Code ID Stripping
When Code ID Stripping is checked, the first character is stripped. When not checked, character stripping occurs
based on the values in the Pre-Strip category.
Code ID
Code ID matches are based on this ID. The asterisk (*) is the default - which means match any character.
Pre-Strip
The Pre-Strip option removes the requested number of characters from the head of the incoming data stream
before it is displayed.
Post-Strip
The Post-Strip option removes the requested number of characters from the tail of the incoming data stream
before it is displayed.
3 - 27
Cursor
Cursor options are provided for easy identification of input fields. You may configure cursor type and auto-scrolling options for
the session.
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure.
• A Configure dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Cursor tab
Note: Automatic scrolling options have expanded. The Lock Position option has been replaced by a pull down list with additional
choices. The Keep Cursor Centered and Keep Cursor Visible checkboxes have been replaced by enhanced pull down
list choices.
Parameters
Cursor Options
This option allows you to change the cursor appearance. The default is Full Block. Three options are available:
• Full Block - The cursor appears as a full character block
• Half Block - The cursor appears as a bottom half block
• Underline - The cursor appears as an underscore line
3 - 28
Automatic Scrolling
This option enables automatic scrolling so the current cursor position is always visible. This option is helpful on mobile
clients with small screens. The default is None. The following auto-scrolling options are available:
• None - No automatic scrolling is performed, except those caused by host app (commands) or the device user (via
mouse or scroll bar). (default)
• Lock Position - The scroll bars are locked and the screen position is maintained limiting the viewing area.
• Smart Lock - Allows movement and viewing outside the locked region but a Send or Host update shifts the screen
back to the Smart Lock position.
• Cursor Centered - The cursor is always as close as possible to the center of the screen. When scrolling limits are
reached, the cursor will move toward the edge of the client display.
• Cursor Centered NS - Same as above, except the cursor is “Non Stick” (NS). The NS selection allows the user to
move the screen around, without a put back to cursor centered. Pressing the escape key will cause a cursor
centering screen adjustment.
• Cursor Visible - The cursor is always visible. The display is scrolled vertically and horizontally to prevent the cursor
from moving out of view.
• Cursor Visible NS - Same as above, except the cursor is “Non Stick” (NS). The NS selection allows the user to
move the screen around, without a put back to cursor visible. Pressing the escape key will cause a cursor visible
screen adjustment.
• Origin - Cursor is forced to the top left corner (origin) in most cases of screen updates and screen shifting.
Note: Unless the user is connected and viewing a scrollable area, the Lock Position and Smart Lock selections are
undefined and automatic scrolling is forced back to None.
3 - 29
Print Data Map
Send and receive data on the same serial port on a per session basis, regardless of print setup. See also Direct Serial (page 46).
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure.
• A Configure dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Print Data Map tab.
Note: The serial port configuration parameters are now located at Com1 and Com2 (page 2-20).
Note: Previous versions may have “Pass thru CR” and “EOT as Null” instead of the expanded “Non-display char conversions”
and “Pass thru exception” options.
Parameters
Non-Display Char Conversion
Allows selected treatment of non-displayable characters (0x0 through 0x1F) when printing:
• Space - Non-display characters are passed through as a space (default).
• None - No conversion is performed on the non-display characters.
• Null - Non-display characters are passed through as a null.
• Deleted - Non-display characters are deleted.
See Pass Thru Exceptions (below) for exceptions to the conversion process.
Pass Thru Exceptions
The following exceptions are provided for the Non-Display Character Conversion rule selected above.
CR as CR
Enable (check) for pass through carriage return. This option passes through both CR and LF.
Default is disabled (blank).
EOT as NULL
Enable (check) to replace EOT (End of Text) with a Null character.
The default is disabled (blank); EOT is a Space character.
Start Print
Allows a start string to be specified to begin screen printing (output data to the com port). The string can contain a
maximum of five characters. When the Start Print field contains data, the emulation searches for the specified Start
Print and End Print strings in the display buffer each time data is received. If the Start Print string is found, the screen
data is sent to the com port until the end of display buffer or until the End Print string (see below) is reached.
3 - 30
This feature is in addition to the *P command, detailed elsewhere in this manual.
The default is no entry, so Start Print is disabled.
End Print
Allows an ending string to be specified to terminate screen printing (output data to the com port). When the Start Print
option is used (see above) screen printing continues until the end of the display buffer unless the End Print string is
specified.
The End Print string can contain a maximum of five characters. When the Start Print field contains data, the emulation
searches for the specified Start Print and End Print strings in the display buffer each time data is received. If the End
Print string is found, only the data beginning with the Start Print string and ending with the End Print string is printed. If
the End Print string is not found, all data from the Start Print string until the end of the display buffer is printed.
If there is no Start Print string specified, any entry in the End Print field is ignored.
The default is no entry, so End Print is disabled.
3 - 31
Auto Login
Use this option to create automatic login scripts.
Note: Previous versions had an Auto Login Enabled checkbox which is replaced by the Auto pulldown list.
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
• A Configure dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Auto Login tab.
Parameters
Auto
Determines if the connection to the session and login are done automatically.
• None - RFTerm does not connect to the session or login automatically.
• Connect Only - RFTerm connects to the session automatically, but does not login automatically. Once connected,
the user must manually login.
• Login Only - RFTerm does not connect to the session automatically, but does login automatically once a manual
connection to a session is established. If no prompt or reply is specified, RFTerm waits at the client login screen,
and proceeds to connect to the next auto login enabled session. Should a session fail to connect, the client is
prompted with a popup dialog requesting a retry or cancel.
• Conn & Log - Both the connection to the session and login are performed automatically by RFTerm. If no prompt
or reply is specified, RFTerm waits at the client login screen, and proceeds to connect to the next auto login enabled
session. Should a session fail to connect, the client is prompted with a popup dialog requesting a retry or cancel.
The default is None.
Autologin Process
When an option with autologin is selected, RFTerm automatically logs in after the session is connected. The connection may either be automatic or manual, depending on the option selected. Once the session is connected, if
no prompt or reply is specified, RFTerm waits at the client login screen, and proceeds to connect to the next auto
login enabled session. Should a session fail to connect, the client is prompted with a popup dialog requesting a
retry or cancel.
Timeout
Enter how long RFTerm will wait for the session to connect and find the prompt string. The default is the standard
RFTerm 30 second connection timeout.
3 - 32
Prompt
Enter the string to search for after RFTerm connects to the auto login enabled session. The prompts must be contained on successive screens or the reply will not be sent. The prompts are case sensitive. Leaving the Prompt blank
but filling in data for the matching Reply will cause the Reply to be performed regardless of the screen data received
from the host.
You can enter up to four Prompt/Reply pairs for 3270 and 5250 sessions and six Prompt/Reply pairs for ANSI sessions.
Reply
Enter the string, or action, to place at the current cursor location when RFTerm finds the Prompt string. Control characters and non-printable characters can be represented using Hat Encoding (page 6-7). The Replies are case sensitive. This data will only be sent to the host if the Reply ends in a carriage return. Maximum of 64 characters.
Note: For 3270 mobile devices, ATTN, CLR, ESC and SYSRQ must be contained within curly brackets { }.
3 - 33
Fn Keys (Function Key Programming)
Allows for programming all available function keys and the 4 arrow keys.
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
• A Configure dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Fn Keys tab.
Parameters
Function Key Combo Box
Select the function key you wish to program. There are currently 40 selections for ANSI emulations and 24 each for
3270 and 5250 sessions. Most ANSI function keys have default values. The 4 arrow keys are also available for programming for all emulations.
Function Key Edit Box
Enter the keystrokes for that function key to perform. Control characters and characters not accessible from the keyboard can be represented using Hat Encoding (page 6-7). Maximum number of characters is 64.
Add
Adds the entry to the function key table.
Clear
Clears the entry in the function key table for the function key highlighted in the function key combo box.
Disable Blank Keys
The default value for Disable Blank Keys is Blank or empty. This option is available for all emulations.
When the Disable Blank Keys checkbox is disabled (empty), all blank/unassigned function keys send nothing when
pressed.
When the Disable Blank Keys checkbox is enabled (checked), then all blank function keys will send the default data for
that function key.
Enable (check) the Disable Blank Keys checkbox to cause all blank function keys to send the default data for that function key.
Explanations:
• An unassigned key, such as F5, can send data assigned to another key, such as F18. Enable this value if you want
unassigned keys to send nothing.
• In ANSI, an F5 keypress (when the F5 key is empty or unprogrammed) will send F18 data (the default value for an
empty F5 key). The F18 data will be either the assigned default for an empty F18 or the user entered data for a nonempty F18.
3 - 34
Keybd
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
• A Configure dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Keybd tab.
Parameters
Default Key Map
When selected, the current operating system default keyboard/keypad function key mapping is in effect.
PC Style Keyboard (IBM only)
When selected, function keys [Shift] [F1] through [Shift] [F12] will map to [F13] through [F24].
The default function key mapping is [Shift] [F1] through [Shift] [F4] will map to [F21] through [F24].
HX2 Function Key Enable
Note: Applies to HX2 with Alpha Mode 3 Tap keyboard only.
When unchecked, F11 - F19 ([Blue] plus [1 - 9]) are used to implement RFTerm functions such as Connect/Disconnect, Hide Bars, etc. This behavior means a F11 - F19 keypress is not sent to the application, but instead performs a
specified RFTerm function.
When checked, virtual keys F11 - F19 ([Blue] plus [1 - 9]) are no longer mapped to RFTerm functions but are mapped
to F11 - F19. Other keypress combinations should be assigned by the user to the RFTerm function.
3 - 35
Two Key Function Keys
When unchecked, the standard Key Maps (page 9-1) for each device apply for F1 through F40. This is the default.
When checked, the following key maps replace the standard key maps for F1 through F40:
3 - 36
F1 and...
Produces
Ctrl or
F2 and...
Produces
F3 and...
Produces
F4 and...
Produces
1
F1
1
F11
1
F21
1
F31
2
F2
2
F12
2
F22
2
F32
3
F3
3
F13
3
F23
3
F33
4
F4
4
F14
4
F24
4
F34
5
F5
5
F15
5
F25
5
F35
6
F6
6
F16
6
F26
6
F36
7
F7
7
F17
7
F27
7
F37
8
F8
8
F18
8
F28
8
F38
9
F9
9
F19
9
F29
9
F39
10
F10
10
F20
10
F30
10
F40
Compatibility
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
• A Configure dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the Compatibility tab.
Parameters
Multi beep on good scan
Enables a multiple beep on a good scan. Default is disabled, a single beep on good scan.
Disable *P
When checked, the *P (IBM print command) is disabled. By default this option is unchecked (*P is treated as the IBM
print command).
Continuous Retries Without Prompt
When checked, RFTerm performs continuous retries on the initial auto connect and any auto reconnect after losing a
connection.
The default is unchecked, no continuous retries without prompting.
A message is displayed on initial connect and on reconnect. No user action is required to begin the connect or reconnect process.
If the connection cannot be established, an error message is displayed. Again, no user input is required and RFTerm
continues to retry the connection.
3 - 37
The retry process continues until:
• A connection is established.
• The user presses [Control] + [D] to end the retry process.
Show Input Error Message
When checked, RFTerm displays a message if the user attempts to input data, either by keypad or scanner, during
Input Inhibit or XCLock.
The default is unchecked, no message is displayed.
3 - 38
SSH
Note: SSH credentials were previously entered on the SSH Auth tab. They are now accessed from this tab using the Configure
button.
• From the application menu, select Session > Configure or tap the Configure button on the ToolBar.
• A Configure dialog box is displayed.
• Choose the SSH tab.
Parameters
SSH Select
Select the type of connection:
• None - Telnet is used without SSH.
• Shell - A direct connection is made to the SSH server. Not supported with IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 emulations.
• Tunnel - A connection is established to an SSH server and Telnet traffic is tunneled or port forwarded through the
SSH connection.
SSH Server Address
Enter the address of the SSH server.
SSH Server Port
Enter the port for the SSH server.
Authorization
Select the type of authorization:
• User+Pswd - Specify a user and password.
• Key File - Specify a User Key File and passphrase.
Configure...
After selecting the desired type of Authorization, click the Configure... button to enter the appropriate credentials.
User Authorization
User authentication requires a user name and password. If the user authorization credentials are not entered on
this screen, the user is prompted to enter the user name and password at the time of connection.
3 - 39
User
Enter the user name for SSH authentication.
Password
Enter the password for SSH authentication.
Private Key File
Private key file authentication requires a user name, a private user key file and an optional passphrase for the key
file.
User
Enter the user name for SSH authentication.
Passphrase
An optional passphrase may be required to use the private key. If a passphrase was specified when the key
file was created, but no passphrase is entered on this screen, the user is prompted for the credentials at the
time of connection.
User Key File
Only one private key file is stored per session. Use the Browse... and OK buttons to locate and select the
private key file.
The private key file is generated on the server side and imported into RFTerm. Once generated, copy the key
file to the RFTerm device. For computers running a Windows CE or Windows Embedded Compact operating
system, the key file must be stored under the \System folder to persist after a reboot.
Browse...
Clicking this button opens an explorer window to locate the key file. By default, only PuTTY private key files
are displayed in the explorer window. Putty private key files are generated using the PuTTY Key Generator.
The PuTTY Key Generator is installed as part of Honeywell's Telnet Manager. Refer to the Telnet Manager
Reference guide for more details.
3 - 40
OK
After using the Browse... button to locate and select a key file, the file location and name are displayed in the
User Key text box. Click the OK button to save the private key information and exit the private key screen.
Advanced...
Click the Advanced... button to manage server keys, keep alives, rekey intervals, etc.
Server Keys
The host key list is global, meaning a Host Key accepted for any session is displayed in all sessions.
When connecting to an SSH session, if the Host is not already in the Global Allowed Host Key list, a warning is
displayed.
3 - 41
The following options are available:
Yes - The key is added to the Global Allowed Host Key list and the connection continues. Use this option for a
trusted host.
No - The key is not added to the Global Allowed Host Key list, however, the connection is allowed just this one
time.
Cancel - The key is not added to the Global Allowed Host Key list and no connection is allowed.
Delete
Select an entry from the Global Allowed Host Key list and tap the Delete button to delete a host key entry.
Allow Connection to Unlisted Host (global)
When selected, only hosts included in the Global Allowed Host Key listing are available for connection.
Before removing the checkmark from this option, first connect to any desired hosts so they are in the Allowed
list. Once all desired hosts are included, then uncheck this item to prevent connection to any other hosts.
Misc
Keep Alive Ping Interval
Use this option to manage SSH Keep Alive messages. The default is 0 minutes (no SSH Keep Alive messages). Any value greater than 0 (whole numbers only) sends SSH Keep Alive messages after the specified
number of minutes.
TCP level Keep Alive is enabled on the Connection (page 3-1) tab.
Rekey After MB of Data
The session key is negotiated at session startup. Because the longer a key is used, the greater the chances
the connection may be successfully attacked, an option is provided to force a new key exchange (from the client side) after the specified MB of data is exchanged.
The default is 0 MB, no rekey is enabled after a certain amount of data is transferred. Any value greater than
0 (whole numbers only) forces a rekey after that amount of data has been transferred. No data passes
through the SSH connection while the rekeying takes place.
Note: The server may also enable rekeying, so rekeying may still happen even if this option and the one below
are disabled.
Rekey After Minutes
The session key is negotiated at session startup. Because the longer a key is used, the greater the chances
the connection may be successfully attacked, an option is provided to force a new key exchange (from the client side) after the specified number of minutes.
3 - 42
The default is 0 minutes, no rekey is enabled after a certain time period. Any value greater than 0 (whole
numbers only) forces a rekey after that length of time. No data passes through the SSH connection while the
rekeying takes place.
Note: The server may also enable rekeying, so rekeying may still happen even if this option and the one above
are disabled.
Compression
When enabled, data compression is used. By default, compression is disabled.
3 - 43
3 - 44
4
Session Interaction
Honeywell RFTerm allows up to four simultaneous host client sessions. Although each of these client sessions may be disconnected or connected, only one session is in the foreground at any time. The session in the foreground is the active session and
receives all user interaction. Connected sessions in the background maintain their host session connections and update their
(hidden) screen content.
Multiple Sessions
You can navigate between multiple sessions either from the ToolBar session menu or the session host menu, by using HotKeys
or the ToolBar.
MenuBar Session Menu
The current active session is indicated in the application Session menu as shown below. Host addresses configured for each of
the host sessions are indicated as part of the session names.
•
•
•
•
Configured sessions are identified by the Host Address specified on the Connection tab.
>> indicates the current active host session.
A checkmark indicates a connected session.
When this menu is displayed, pressing 1 - 4 selects the corresponding session.
In the example above:
• Current Active Host Session is S1 and it is ready to be configured or to connect.
• S2 is connected.
Session Host Menu
The Session Host Menu can be enabled on the Status (page 2-17) tab by checking the Host Menu checkbox.
4-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configured sessions are identified by the Host Address and Host Name as specified on the Connection tab.
>> indicates the current active host session.
C after the session ID indicates a connected session.
Current Active Host Session is S1.
S2 is connected.
When this menu is displayed, pressing 1 - 4 connects to the corresponding session (if that session is not already
connected) or returns control to the corresponding session (if that session is already connected).
• When enabled, the Session Host Menu is automatically displayed on the idle RFTerm screen and dismissed when the
active session is connected.
• Pressing [Ctrl] [Alt] [0] displays the Session Host Menu over top of a connected session Repeating the keypress
sequence dismisses the menu over a connected session.
HotKey Session Selection
The following ToolBar items and HotKeys are available to switch between sessions:
[Ctrl] [Shift] [J]
Jump to next connected session
[Ctrl] [Alt] [1]
Jump to Session 1
[Ctrl] [Alt] [2]
Jump to Session 2
[Ctrl] [Alt] [3]
Jump to Session 3
[Ctrl] [Alt] [4]
Jump to Session 4
[Ctrl] [Alt] [0]
Display Session Host Menu (if enabled) over top of a connected session (see above for details)
ToolBar Session Selection
The following ToolBar items can be enabled on the Custom Bar (page 2-8) and used to switch between sessions:
Jump to next connected session
Jump to Session 1
Jump to Session 2
Jump to Session 3
Jump to Session 4
4-2
Password Protection
Access to the Session and Configure dialogs can be password protected.
•
•
•
•
•
From the application menu, select File > Settings.
A Settings dialog box is displayed.
Select the Options tab.
Press the Config Password button.
Enter the password and verify.
Any attempt to open either the Settings or Configure dialogs will prompt the user for the password.
To remove password protection, first enter the password. Use the Backspace key to erase the password. Tap the OK button.
Contact Technical Assistance (page 10-1) in the event of a lost or forgotten password.
Connecting / Disconnecting from Host
To connect to a host, configure the client session parameters and select “Connect” from the application menu. Only disconnected sessions may be connected. Once connected, you may disconnect the host session by selecting a “Disconnect” from
the application menu.
You must configure the host session prior to attempting a connection.
From the application menu select Session > Connect to connect or Session > Disconnect to disconnect. You may also tap
the Connect / Disconnect button on the ToolBar.
If the Host Session Menu is displayed on the desktop, pressing 1 - 4 connects to the corresponding session (if that session is
not already connected) or returns control to the corresponding session (if that session is already connected).
If Session Start Control is enabled (see File > Settings > Status) a confirmation box is displayed before the connection is
made.
Clicking OK or pressing [Enter] starts the indicated session.
Clicking Cancel or the X (depending on operating system) or pressing [Esc] exits without starting the indicated session.
4-3
Device Name In Use
When RFTerm receives an incoming host message that indicates the device name is in use, a “Device Name in Use” dialog
box is displayed. The user clicks the OK button or the X button to close the dialog box.
SmartPads
Depending upon the terminal emulation type, certain keys may be required to navigate within the host application. The SmartPad is a soft keypad that provides access to all emulation specific keys. You can invoke the SmartPad only if the session is connected. The correct SmartPad appears for the emulation type of the current active session.
You can invoke the SmartPad from the application menu by selecting Display > SmartPad. You may also tap the “SmartPad”
button on the ToolBar.
You may use the SmartPad HotKey [Ctrl][Shift][P] to invoke this operation.
SmartPads are not configurable dynamically.
Note: This option is not available on devices with a Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard
operating system.
Configurable KeyBar
Most hand-held devices have a limited keypad. They often rely upon their internal Soft Input Panel (SIP) to type in data. However, the SIP usage is cumbersome and it does not provide any special host keys such as those needed in a terminal emulation
program.
The configurable KeyBar allows users to customize a set of soft keys to invoke any host specific keys or emulator operations.
Users can select from a set of pre-defined KeyBar templates. In addition, they can also configure up to four Custom KeyBars of
their own. Users can navigate or “cycle” within a selected subset of KeyBars.
For CE devices, the KeyBar appears next to the application Menu and ToolBar. You can le it on or off by pressing the KeyBar
icon next to the application menu. The emulator screen automatically adjusts to provide the maximum possible screen real
estate.
To configure the KeyBar, refer to the Options1 (page 2-6) section under Configuration. Take some time to customize the KeyBar
and become familiar with its use. It will be time well spent.
When enabled, the KeyBar appears on “top” of either the application menu, application ToolBar or SIP, depending upon their visibility state. Tap the arrow button on either end to cycle backward or forward through the configured KeyBars.
There are several pre-defined KeyBars that are provided with the application. These serve as emulation specific or operation
specific templates. You may use these in addition to the customized KeyBars. The following table shows these pre-defined
KeyBar templates.
See Also
The bitmaps and associated action text for all the actions and operations that can be associated with the configurable keys can
be found at RFTerm ToolBar (page 9-1).
KeyBar Name
Base Keys
Special Keys
Scroll Keys
F1 - F8
F9 - F16
F17 - F24
4-4
KeyBar Buttons
KeyBar Name
KeyBar Buttons
F25 - F32
F33 - F40
IBM 1
IBM 2
IBM 3
VT 1
VT 2
VT 3
UDK11 - UDK18
Digits 0 - 4
Digits 5 - 9
4-5
Print Setup
You can configure a printer for RFTerm.
• From the application menu, select File > Print Setup.
This will bring up a popup dialog. All options may not be present, depending on device configuration.
Note: Previous versions may display an alternate menu. The Serial button is similar in function to the Direct Serial button on
the newer interface. The Windows button is similar in function to the Installed Printer button on the newer interface.
Print Method
Print Method is used to specify which print method you wish to use.
Installed Printer
If you select Installed Printer, a standard Microsoft Windows Print dialog box will appear.
Direct Serial
If you select Direct Serial, the following dialog is displayed:
This dialog contains parameters that are identical, except for the Pass thru CR checkbox, to the Com1 and Com2
(page 2-20) dialog. Review that section for Serial Data parameter details.
Select the external COM Port for the device and click OK. The device must have a serial printer attached to this COM
port.
4-6
All RFTerm print commands will then send unformatted data to the serial printer. A screen print can be performed by
using the keyboard shortcut [Ctrl] [Alt] [P].
Com Port Error Dialog
Should RFTerm be unable to apply any of the COM Port settings, the following popup dialog will appear:
Cradle Printing via IR
When a mobile client with an IR port is docked in a cradle and COM2 is selected as the serial print port on the
mobile client, RFTerm immediately takes control of the port and continues to listen for print requests from the
mobile client. RFTerm releases COM2 when the connection between the mobile client’s COM2 port and the cradle is disconnected. While RFTerm is polling and controlling the cradle connection, the connection cannot be
used by another application.
Media Copy Command
The serial port is opened on the initial MC command, all data received is written and the serial port is closed upon
receipt of the proper MC command. Before the data is written to the serial port, the data is examined for carriage
returns (CR / CR LF) within 80 bytes of the previous data stream. If found, the counter is reset and line wrapping/
dropping does not occur.
IP
If you select IP, you can specify the IP address of a printer. The IP address can be specified in the textbox, for example: 100.100.100.100
The default port value is 515. By following the IP address with a colon ‘:’ and a port number, an alternative port number can be specified, for example: 100.100.100.100:516
Using a Bar Code to Input IP Address
The IP address of the printer can also be specified by scanning a special bar code. To create the bar code, use
any commercially available bar code software using the format %$.TP followed by the IP address desired.
Example
1. Create a bar code from the string %$.TP100.100.100.100 where 100.100.100.100 is the IP address of the
desired printer.
2. Print the bar code using a printer with a minimum 600x600 resolution.
3. With RFTerm running on the device, scan the bar code with an internal, ring or tethered scanner attached to an
Honeywell computer.
4. The IP contents of the string, 100.100.100.100 in this case, are inserted in the IP textbox.
Scanner Applet
If the mobile client running RFTerm supports Wedge Output, Scanner Applet can be selected.
Not all COM port parameters supported in RFTerm can be supported by the mobile client Wedge due to the small form
factor of the client.
Note: This option is only available if the mobile client supports Scanner Wedge output. For mobile clients that do not
support Wedge output, the Scanner Applet option is not available.
4-7
Bluetooth
When the mobile device supports Bluetooth, the Print Setup tab contains a selection for a Bluetooth printer.
Note: You may need to pair with a Bluetooth printer before this option is available.
Print Type
Select the desired print buffering type. The default is Normal.
• Normal - Printing is done synchronously, one character at a time. Input is blocked until the print is completed.
• Buffer - RFTerm can accept scanner or keyboard input while serial printing. This allows RFTerm to buffer the print data
and perform the serial printing in a separate thread.
• MC dly1 - RFTerm buffers print, but delays approximately 100 milliseconds between consecutive media copy commands.
• MC dly2 - RFTerm buffers print, but delays approximately 300 milliseconds between consecutive media copy commands.
• MC dly3 - RFTerm buffers print, but delays approximately 500 milliseconds between consecutive media copy commands.
• MC dly4 - RFTerm buffers print, but delays approximately 1 second between consecutive media copy commands.
Note: Previous versions had a Buffer Print checkbox. When checked print is buffered. When unchecked print is normal.
Out of Range
There are configuration options for the behavior of RFTerm in case the mobile client loses contact with the host. The Out of
Range options described in this section are valid for both RF (802.11) and WWAN connections to the host.
Should the mobile client lose contact with the host, RFTerm can attempt to reconnect the active session. To enable this feature,
select Session > Configure > Connection and check the Retry on Signal Loss checkbox. For more details, refer to
Connection (page 3-1).
RFTerm can be configured monitor the network connection and provide an indication when the network connection is lost. To
enable this feature, select File > Settings > Options and check the Check Network Status checkbox. If this option is disabled,
RFTerm provides notification of the lost connection only after a data transmission has timed out. The type of notification
received depends on the option selected. For more details, refer to Options1 (page 2-6).
Text InputTool
Note: This option is not available on devices with a Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard
operating system.
The Text InputTool sends complete text strings to the display window at the current cursor location. A user can cache a set of
alphanumeric text strings in the input tool.
You can invoke the InputTool from the application menu by selecting Display > InputTool. You may also tap the InputTool button on the ToolBar.
You can also invoke the Text InputTool by using the HotKey [Ctrl][Shift][I].
You can build your cached list of text strings by pasting text from the clipboard (For example [Edit][Copy] in Microsoft WordPad)
directly into the Text InputTool edit box. You can also directly type a text string into the edit box using the system soft keypad.
Lastly, you can initialize this list from an ASCII text file.
Command
Description
Paste
Tapping the Paste button will copy any text from the clipboard into the edit box.
4-8
Command
Description
Add
Tapping the Add button adds any text in the edit box to the cache list. If the text string is already is in the list,
it is not added again. Blank strings are not added.
Tapping the Del button deletes the currently selected text string from the cache list.
Tapping the Clear button clears the edit box.
Tapping the File button opens a dialog to select a text file that can be read to initialize the list. Each text string
to be added to the list must be on a separate line delimited by a CRLF. The following shows a sample input
text file:
78438-8889-9494
Any text string here
Username
It is recommended that you create a file for initializing the list on the desktop and then ActiveSync it to the
mobile client. Each session has its own list.
The Send button sends the currently selected text string to the current cursor location on the client display.
Sends a carriage return keystroke to the TE application.
Sends a Tab keystroke to the TE application.
Sends a back tab keystroke to the TE application. This is equivalent to [Shift][Tab].
Sends an Escape keystroke to the TE application.
Del
Clear
File
Send
Enter
Tab
BTab
Esc
Each entry in the list is preceded by an index value in the form “1”. This index, including the first space after the period, is
stripped before sending. You can edit an existing list entry by selecting it, making your changes, then pressing Add. The saved
list entry replaces the existing entry contents with the new value. If there is no leading index value, for example on a new entry,
then Add will append a new list entry.
To create an entry, which begins with text similar to an index, first create a dummy entry, then edit it to include your desired text.
For example, to create an entry with the contents “1. My text”, first enter the text “new” and press Add. Assume that this
becomes the third entry. Select the entry from the list and change “3. new” to “3. 1. My text”, then press Add again.
The index values are used to identify the text sent with the “Input n” keys on the KeyBar. Be careful when deleting entries.
Doing so may change the text sent via an Input key.
Special characters can also be entered in the text. This can be especially useful under VT emulation when custom escape
sequences are required. The following special characters are available:
The Text InputTool also accepts characters specified by Hat Encoding (page 6-7).
Operator
Meaning
\e
\n
\r
\t
\xDD
ESC character/action
Newline character/action
Enter character/action
TAB character/action
Hexadecimal value of byte
4-9
HotSpots
A HotSpot is a field on the client screen where a user can tap with a stylus to execute a function. This allows a user to interact
with a host application without using physical keys or the KeyBar. A simple example might be the use of PF Keys. An operation
associated with a PF key might be displayed on the client as “PF1 = Help”. RFTerm emulators automatically detect this as a
HotSpot and will send a PF1 key to the host when you tap on the PF1 text on the client display. To invoke a HotSpot, tap anywhere on the text of that HotSpot. HotSpots are not user configurable.
HotSpots are supported for 3270, 5250 and VT emulations. The emulations share some forms of HotSpots, such as function
keys and menus, but others depend on the type of emulation.
The following table lists some text strings that are recognized as HotSpots.
HotSpot String
Sends
PFx=
PFxx=
Function key x. where x is between 1..9
For 3270, 5250 emulations: Function key x. where x is between 10..24
For VT emulations: Function key x. where x is between 10..20
Menu option xx. where xx is any one or two digit number
Function key x. where x is between 1..24
Function key x. where x is between 1..24
Sends Enter key
Selects menu choice X
Sends Enter key
Roll Up key (5250 only)
Roll Down Key (5250 only)
Roll Down AID (5250 only)
Roll Down AID (5250 only)
xx.
Fxx=
<Fxx>=
Enter
“X. Menu choice”
Double Tap
+
More
Bottom
Note: Prior to using a “menu choice” HotSpot, the cursor must be in the input field where the menu choice is submitted. (Applies
to IBM emulation only.)
Note: Reprogramming the functions keys using the Fn Keys tab under the Configure dialog alters the operation of a function key
HotSpot.
HotSpots are sensitive to the stylus calibration on the device. To get accurate HotSpot taps, make sure your touch screen is
correctly calibrated.
4 - 10
Screen Panning
Most host applications have been designed for the desktop screen form factor. When viewing these applications from a handheld device, only a portion of the host screen is visible because of the smaller display of the hand-held device. Horizontal and
vertical scroll bars are typically used to set the virtual screen location. As an alternative to scroll bars, the screen can be positioned by “dragging” the stylus.
Imagine the host application screen as a large sheet under the display on the hand-held device. Screen Panning allows users
to “tap” and “drag” this sheet in any direction to move hidden areas of the host display into view on the hand-held device without
the use of scroll bars.
Follow these steps to use panning:
• Connect to a host application
• With the stylus, “tap and hold” anywhere on the client screen. Be careful not to tap on a HotSpot, if you do not also want a
HotSpot action
• Drag the stylus, without lifting, to drag hidden areas of the screen into view
There is no configuration for Screen Panning. It is enabled whenever HotSpots are enabled for touch screen devices.
Access Control / Device Lockdown
In some cases, there is a need to prevent users from being able to change the emulator configuration. Further there may be a
requirement to prevent users from exiting the TE application or launching other applications on the device. The Access Control
features address these needs. Refer to the Options1 (page 2-6) configuration section for details on configuring these features.
Note: Devices with a Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard operating system can
additionally be locked down by configuring the OS.
Note: Devices with a Windows CE or Windows Mobile operating system can additionally be locked down using Honeywell's
AppLock. Details on configuring and using AppLock are contained in the equipment specific reference guide.
Access control functionality allows for the following:
• Administrators can add Password Protection (page 4-3) to the RFTerm session configuration settings. This prevents users
from changing the configuration:
• From within the application
• By loading another session
• Saving the current session (to then load onto another device)
• Prevent users from invoking another application by disabling the Start menu. This prevents users from invoking another
application while running the Terminal Emulation program.
• Prevent users from exiting the emulator by disabling the application exit feature.
4 - 11
HotKey Shortcuts
RFTerm has several predefined HotKeys. These may normally be used with devices that have a keypad. The following table
lists the default HotKeys.
HotKey
Description
[Ctrl][Shift][N]
[Ctrl][Shift][E]
[Ctrl][Shift][C]
[Ctrl][Shift][Down Arrow]
[Ctrl][Shift][D]
[Ctrl][Shift][F]
[Ctrl][Shift][H]
[Ctrl][Shift][P]
Configure dialog box
Settings dialog box
Connect to the host
Decrease font size
Disconnect a connected host session
Displays dialog box for WWAN signal strength and connectivity status.
Display or Hide horizontal scroll bar
Display or Hide SmartPad
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard)
Display or Hide Text InputTool
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard)
Display or Hide all bars (Menu, Tool, Key)
Display or Hide MenuBar (also see Reset Menu Bar Code (page 4-13)
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard)
Display or Hide ToolBar
Display or Hide KeyBar
Display or Hide vertical scroll bar
Display all bars at the bottom
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard)
Exit the emulator
Hide and unhide status bar (OIA)
Increase font size
Invoke the session save dialog.
Jump to next connected host
Display Host Menu
Jump to Session 1
Jump to Session 2
Jump to Session 3
Jump to Session 4
Scroll down one row
Scroll left one column
Scroll right one column
Scroll up one row
Scroll down one row segment (see Note below)
Scroll left one column segment (see Note below)
Scroll right one column segment (see Note below)
Scroll up one row segment (see Note below)
le between bold and normal font
Display or Hide status icons
(Not supported on Windows Mobile)
Print the screen of the active session
Display frequently used shortcuts.
[Ctrl][Shift][I]
[Ctrl][Shift][L]
[Ctrl][Shift][M]
[Ctrl][Shift][T]
[Ctrl][Shift][K]
[Ctrl][Shift][V]
[Ctrl][Shift][B]
[Ctrl][Shift][X]
[Ctrl][Shift][O] or [Alt][T]
[Ctrl][Shift][Up Arrow]
[Ctrl][Shift][S]
[Ctrl][Shift][J]
[Ctrl][Alt][0]
[Ctrl][Alt][1]
[Ctrl][Alt][2]
[Ctrl][Alt][3]
[Ctrl][Alt][4]
[Shift][Down Arrow]
[Shift][Left Arrow]
[Shift][Right Arrow]
[Shift][Up Arrow]
[Ctrl][Down Arrow]
[Ctrl][Left Arrow]
[Ctrl][Right Arrow]
[Ctrl][Up Arrow]
[Ctrl][Shift][1]
[Ctrl][Shift][2]
[Ctrl][Alt][P]
[Ctrl][H]
Note: Depending on mobile client screen and font size constraints, the segment area used by a [Ctrl]+[Arrow] key sequence is
approximately one-quarter of the total area available.
4 - 12
Shortcuts for Devices without Keypads
The Dolphin 70e Black does not have a traditional keypad. Some shortcut icons have been added to the RFTerm MenuBar
for this device.
Display or Hide KeyBar (equivalent to [Ctrl][Shift][T] on a traditional keyboard)
Display or hide virtual keyboard
Toggle virtual keypad layout, also seeVirtual Keyboard (page 2-13)
Rotates the display 90º counter-clockwise, also see VK Orientation (page 2-13)
Reset Menu Bar Code
For any device, but especially the wearable version of the Dolphin 70e Black which does not have a physical keyboard, the
bar code below can be scanned to restore the Windows Start Menu if hidden via the Options1 (page 2-6) tab or the RFTerm
MenuBar if hidden via the Display (page 2-1) tab.
Automatic Session Startup
You can automate startup of up to four host sessions when the TE application starts. To do so, enable the Auto Login Enabled
box in the Session > Configure > Auto Login tab, for each of the sessions that you want to automatically start. Each of these
sessions will attempt a connection to the configured host when the emulator is started. If a connection cannot be established,
the following popup dialog will appear, indicating the session number:
4 - 13
4 - 14
5
ANSI
ANSI Client Overview
Block Mode Communication
Block mode communication is a communication mode that enables the client to send an entire block of data to the host at
one time. Refer to Sending the Client Screen to the Host (page 5-2) for more details. Block mode greatly reduces RF traffic
by sending data in this way. Block mode minimizes RF overhead better than the other modes. Thus, block mode supports
more users on an RF channel and allows faster response time.
Local echo is a process that allows each character to display locally at the client as the client user presses the keys. The
host does not see these characters until the user presses the [Enter] key.
Note: In most cases, operations using programming tools that include screen painters cannot use block mode
communication. Screen painters or designers usually come with programming tools such as Oracle, Ingress,
Informix, and Powerhouse, which normally use character mode communications.
Block Mode Setup
Refer to the following rules for setting up block mode communication:
• The programmer must include the following commands in the command string for setting up block mode:
ESC[12l (turn local echo on in SRM)
ESC[=1l (turn block mode on in LXELM)
Note: If local echo is off in send-receive mode (SRM), the client operates in character mode while the scroll or
block mode setting in LXELM is ignored.
• The programmer must send formatted screens to the client from the host.
Scroll Mode Communication
Scroll mode communication is a communication mode where the client allows data entry only on one line. The client user
can view the rest of the form, but the cursor returns to the line the host placed the cursor in whenever the user tries to enter
data.
Scroll mode has the following advantages:
• Provides local protection of unformatted text.
• Protects all information on the screen except the command line, which is the line where the host positions the cursor.
Character positions to the left of the cursor’s current position are also protected.
• Enables the client user to move the cursor around the screen with the arrow keys. If the user moves the cursor, with the
arrow keys, away from the command line and then tries to enter data, the cursor returns to the command line before
accepting the data.
Note: Applications that edit individual characters do not perform well in scroll mode.
Scroll Mode Setup
Refer to the following rules for setting up scroll mode communications:
• The programmer must include the following commands in the command string for setting up scroll mode:
ESC[12l (turn on local echo in SRM)
ESC[=1h (turn on scroll mode in LXESM)
• The programmer must construct a form consisting of one unprotected field on one line.
Initialization
The ANSI TE powers up in char mode and stays that way until the host changes the TE’s mode. The host must specify that
scroll or block mode is to be used during the current session.
5-1
Sending the Client Screen to the Host
Character Mode
Since each keypress is sent to the host as it is pressed, there is no concept of sending the screen in character mode.
Pressing the [Enter] key in this case will simply send a carriage return and/or line feed to the host. No other sections of
the Scroll Mode screen are sent as a result of pressing [Enter].
Scroll Mode
Scroll mode allows user input on only one line of the display at a time until the user presses [Enter]. When this happens, the cursor will jump back to the active position if necessary. The cells between command start and command
end will be sent to the host. The GATM/SATM/MATM modes are ignored in scroll mode. See Scroll Mode
Communication (page 5-1) for more details.
Block Mode
Block mode allows the user to input in any unprotected area on the display until the client user presses [Enter]. When
this happens, the client will look at the current settings of GATM, SATM and MATM to determine exactly which screen
cells are transmitted back to the host. The settings of these three modes yields 6 different combinations of cells (see
the table below, “Sending The Screen In Block Mode”).
Protected cells are cells tagged with SPA (Start Protected Area) or DAQ 1 (Define Area Qualification).
Unprotected cells are cells that are neither SSA (Start Selected Area) nor SPA nor DAQ 1.
Note: DAQ 8 cells are considered unprotected.
Case #
Description of Cells Sent
Kind of Cells Sent
1
Entire screen
2
(x = don't care)
GATM
SATM
MATM
All
set
1h
set
17h
x
Current/next selected only
1 SSA
set
1h
reset
17l
reset
15l
3
All selected and all unprotected
SSA +
!(SPA/DAQ1)
reset
1l
reset
17l
set
15h
4
Current/next selected and all unprotected
1 SSA +
!(SPA/DAQ1/SSA)
reset
1l
reset
17l
reset
15l
5
All selected
SSA
set
1h
reset
17l
set
15h
6
All unprotected
!SSA +
!(SPA/DAQ1)
reset
1l
set
17h
x
To use the table, first decide which of the 6 cases is desired. For example, to use case #6 set SATM and reset GATM.
Since MATM is don’t care in this case, it does not need to be set either way. Set up the screen so that it is marked protected or selected except where the client user will enter data. Now when the user presses [Enter], all cells that are not
SSA, not SPA and not DAQ1 will be sent back to the host.
Sending the screen always operates on the virtual screen so EBM (Editing Boundary Mode) is ignored. Tab fields do
not affect how the screen is sent.
When sending the screen, the “current/next” selected area means that if the cursor is currently on a selected area, that
area will be sent. If not, search forward in the screen to find one and use that one. If none are found before the end of
the screen, reset to the screen origin and look from there. If the client returns to the cursor position without finding one,
it sends nothing.
In all cases the screen is scanned starting from the origin and each cell is transmitted in the order in which it is programmed on the display. For example, #5 means start at the origin and scan forward for all selected cells (type SSA
only) sending them in the order they are found. For case #4, the current/next selected area is found first based on the
current cursor position and it is remembered. However, the cells are still transmitted starting from the origin. The
selected area is simply transmitted when the client comes across it in the display.
5-2
A single area separator (HT 0/9) byte is inserted into the transmit stream for each protected area on the screen (for
case #3, 4, 5 and 6 only). However, if the first or last area on the screen is protected, no separator byte is inserted.
For example, assume case #3 is in effect. If the first few cells of the screen are defined as follows where p is a protected cell, s is an SSA selected cell and u is an unprotected cell:
p1 p1 p1 s1 s1 s1 p2 p2 p2 s2 s2 s2 p3 p3 p3 s3 s3 s3 u1 u1 u1 ...
yields a transmit stream of:
s1 s1 s1 HT s2 s2 s2 HT s3 s3 s3 u1 u1 u1...
Note: No separator is inserted for the first protected area on the screen. No separator appears between s3 and u1
since there are no protected cells between them.
If the last few cells on the same display are defined as follows:
...p4 p4 p4 p4 u2 u2 u2 u2 u2 p5 s4 s4 s4 s4 p6 p6
yields a transmit stream of:
...HT u2 u2 u2 u2 u2 HT s4 s4 s4 s4
Note: No separator is inserted for the last protected area on the screen.
To reduce traffic between the client and the host when sending the screen, use cases #3, #5 and #6. Tag most of the
screen as protected by using SPA or DAQ1. Leave only the cells that the user will type/scan into as unprotected/
selected. When the client user presses [Enter] to send the screen, only the unprotected/selected cells will be sent separated by tabs.
Tabbing
Three types of tabs are provided in the client:
• default
• area
• regular
Only one type of tab can be active at any time. Previously set tabs may be suppressed by a tab type with a higher priority.
However, the suppressed tabs are still defined in the client.
Block mode must be active for the [Tab] key to work. If the [Tab] key is pressed in character mode, it will be transmitted
back to the host. It is up to the host to echo it back to actually perform the tab. In scroll mode, pressing the [Tab] key is
equivalent to pressing the [Spacebar] key.
The host may perform tabbing by sending the appropriate commands (i.e. HT) to the client regardless of the mode it is in.
When a tab command is received or the client user presses the [Tab] key, the cursor will move forward until the next tab
stop is found. If none is found before the end of the display, the cursor will move to the origin of the virtual display and continue searching. The client will not tab to a tab that is in a protected area. Tabs are stationary and do not scroll when the
screen does. EBM is ignored when the client tabs.
Default Tabs
These tabs are present when the client is first powered up. They appear on every line starting in column one and are
spaced 8 columns apart (i.e. 1, 9, 17, etc.). These tabs have the lowest priority and they can be neither set nor erased
by the host.
Area Tabs
These tabs can be set by the DAQ, SSA, EPA and ESA commands. They can be set by the host on any screen cell
within the virtual display. These tabs have a medium priority. Setting one or more area tabs suppresses all of the
default tabs. They can be erased only by the ED (Erase in Display) and EL (Erase in Line) commands when ERM
(ERasure Mode) is set. If all of the area tabs are erased (and there are no regular tabs) the default tabs are restored.
5-3
Regular Tabs
These tabs can be set by the HTS, CTC and DAQ 7 commands. They can be set by the host on any screen cell within
the virtual display. These tabs have high priority. Setting one or more regular tabs suppresses all default and area
tabs. Regular tabs can be erased by the CTC, HTS and TBC commands. If all of the regular tabs are erased, any
existing area tabs are restored. If no area tabs exist, the default tabs are restored.
ANSI Control Codes
Control codes enable a programmer to control or modify a client and attached device. ANSI control codes consist of 7-bit and 8bit control codes. This section provides information for the programmer on formatting control codes for Honeywell equipment.
All the control codes supported by Honeywell are listed in this section. If a control code is not listed, Honeywell does not support it, and it is treated as a no operation (NOP).
Using the 8-Bit Code Table
The 8-bit code table has the same number of rows as the 7-bit code table, but twice as many columns. The codes on the
left half of the table (columns 0 - 7) are used in a 7-bit and 8-bit environment. The eighth bit of these codes is 0. The codes
on the right half of the table (columns 8 - 15) have an eighth bit of 1. These codes are used in an 8-bit environment and
indirectly in a 7-bit environment.
The mnemonics in columns 0 and 1 are C0 (control 0) codes, which can be used in 7-bit environments. The mnemonics in
columns 8 and 9 are C1 (control 1) codes, which can be used in 8-bit environments and indirectly in 7-bit environments as
escape sequences.
A code table is a tool used to group all the characters in a character set with their codes.
A mnemonic is an abbreviated name that can be a single control character, escape sequence, or a control sequence.
8-Bit Code Table
Refer to the 8-bit code table below that lists all the decimal, hexadecimal, and octal values for each character:
5-4
5-5
5-6
C0 Codes: 7-Bit Control Codes
C0 codes are 7-bit control codes that enable the programmer to perform basic functions with Honeywell clients and
attached devices. This section lists all the C0 codes supported by Honeywell equipment. The examples show applications
for each control code. Not all C0 codes are supported by Honeywell equipment. If a code is not listed, Honeywell does not
support it, and it is treated as a no operation (NOP).
BEL - Bell
Function
BEL causes the client to play the Good Sound.
Hexadecimal Value
07
Control Code
^G
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a BEL command in the C programming language:
printf(“Alert the user to this message!”);
printf(“\007\007\007\007”); /*Beep 4 times*/
BS - Backspace
Function
BS moves the cursor one space to the left. The cursor stops at the left margin of the virtual display.
Hexadecimal Value
08
Control Code
^H
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a BS command in the C programming language:
printf(“The cursor will backspace one space.”);
printf(“\010”); /*(Octal for hex 08)*/
5-7
CR - Carriage Return
Function
CR returns the cursor to the left margin (of the virtual screen) of the row that the cursor is currently in.
Hexadecimal Value
0D
Control Code
^M
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CR command in the C programming language:
printf(“Return cursor to beginning of \n”);
printf(“this second line.”);
printf(“\015”); /*Octal for hex 0D*/
DC2 - Device Control 2
Function
DC2 is ignored by the client device while media copy is enabled. The DC2 code will not be sent to the printer.
Hexadecimal Value
12
Control Code
^R
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an DC2 command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[5i”); /*Enables following text to copy to the RS-232 port*/
printf(“This message will copy to the RS-232 port.”);
printf(“\022”); /*Terminal ignores this code and does not send it to the RS-232
port.*/
printf(“\033[4i”); /*Disables RS-232 port*/
5-8
DC4 - Device Control 4
Function
DC4 is an alternative way to turn off media copy.
Hexadecimal Value
14
Control Code
^T
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an DC4 command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[5i”); /*Enables following text to copy to the RS-232 port*/
printf(“This message will copy to the RS-232 port.”);
printf(“\020”); /*Disables RS-232 port*/
DEL - Delete
Function
DEL erases a character in the data stream. DEL is for client user use only. The host does not send this command.
Hexadecimal Value
7F
Control Code
[Delete]
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
If an user enters a keystroke by mistake, the user can press [Del] causing the client to backspace, which deletes
the last character.
5-9
ENQ - Inquiry
Function
ENQ requests a response from the client. The client responds with an answerback message.
Hexadecimal Value
05
Control Code
^E
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an ENQ command in the C programming language:
printf(“Requesting client response now.”);
printf(“\005”); /*Octal for hex 05*/
gets(input_str); /*input_str = LXE/q/08/TERMS67001C/0010*/
ESC - Escape
Function
ESC extends the set of ANSI controls by acting as a code extension.
Hexadecimal Value
1B
Control Code
^[
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an ESC command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033E”); /*Octal for hex 1B.
5 - 10
ESC E is a NEL command*/
FF - Form Feed
Function
FF is processed as a line feed (LF) in Honeywell clients and advances the cursor down one line. Refer to LF - Line
Feed (page 5-12) control code for a more detailed description.
Hexadecimal Value
0C
Control Code
^L
Modes that affect this code
Scroll Region, LNM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an FF command in the C programming language:
printf(“This appears on line 1.\n”);
printf(“\014”); /*(Octal for hex 0C)*/
printf(“\014”);
printf(“This appears on line 4.”);
See Also
LF - Line Feed (page 5-12)
HT - Horizontal Tab
Function
HT moves the cursor to the next predetermined position (tab stop) to the right, within the virtual screen.
If there are no more tab stops after the cursor, it will jump to the origin of the screen and continue looking for the
next tab stop from there.
Note: The cursor will not tab to any protected screen cells.
Hexadecimal Value
09
Control Code
^I
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format the HT command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[1;25H”); /*CUP-place cursor at 1,25*/
printf(“\033H”); /*HTS-Set Tab*/
printf(“\033[1;1H”); /*CUP-place cursor at 1,1*/
printf(“\011”); /*HT-tab to 1,25. Octal for hex 09*/
5 - 11
LF - Line Feed
Function
LF moves the cursor down one line.
If the cursor is outside the scrolling region when the Line Feed is received, it will not move past the bottom of the
virtual screen. Scrolling does not occur outside the scrolling region.
If the cursor is on the bottom row of the scrolling region when the Line Feed is received and the client is in scroll
mode, a blank line is inserted at the cursor and the screen scrolls up one (1) row.
Hexadecimal Value
0A
Control Code
^J
Modes that affect this code
Scroll Region, LNM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an LF command in the C programming language:
print(“\033[20h”); /*Set LNM*/
printf(“This appears on line 1.\n”);
printf(“\012”); /*Octal for hex 0A*/
printf(“\012”);
printf(“This appears on line 4.”);
NUL - Null
Function
NUL acts as a space-fill or time-fill character.
Note: You can insert a NUL anywhere in the data stream without affecting the information content.
Hexadecimal Value
00
Control Code
^@
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a NUL command in the C programming language:
printf(“There will \000not be any\n”);
printf(“extra \000characters here.”);
5 - 12
VT - Vertical Tab
Function
VT is processed as a line feed (LF) in LXE clients and advances the cursor down one line. Refer to the Line Feed
control code for a more detailed description.
Hexadecimal Value
07
Control Code
^G
Modes that affect this code
Scroll Region, LNM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a VT command in the C programming language:
printf(“This appears on line 1.\n”);
printf(“\013”); /*(Octal for hex 0B)*/
printf(“\013”);
printf(“This appears on line 4.”);
See Also
LF - Line Feed (page 5-12)
5 - 13
C1 Codes: 8-Bit Control Codes
C1 codes are 8-bit control codes that enable the programmer to perform various functions with Honeywell clients and
attached devices. Some environments operate in 7-bit code; therefore, 8-bit control codes also have 7-bit equivalents. This
section lists all the C1 codes supported by Honeywell equipment. The examples show applications for each control code.
Honeywell supports most of the C1 codes but not all of them. If a code is not listed, Honeywell does not support it, and it is
treated as a no operation (NOP).
CSI - Control Sequence Introducer
Function
CSI indicates the start of a control sequence.
Hexadecimal Value
9B
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC[
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CSI command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[10C”); /*CUF moves cursor 10 spaces forward.
033[ represents hex 9B*/
EPA - End of Protected Area
Function
EPA indicates that the cursor’s position is the end of a string of character positions protected from alteration by the
client and guarded against transmission back to the host. The area from the cursor position forward is marked to
accept all input as if a DAQ 0 command was issued from that position.
Hexadecimal Value
97
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC W
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an EPA command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033V”); /*SPA*/
printf(“This is the start of a protected area\n”);
printf(“This is the end of a protected area”);
printf(“\033W”); /*EPA*/
See Also
SPA - Start of Protected Area (page 5-18) (which precedes an EPA command)
5 - 14
ESA - End of Selected Area
Function
ESA indicates that the cursor position is the end of a string of character positions selected for transmission in a
data stream to the host. The area from the cursor position forward is marked to accept all input as if a DAQ 0 command was issued from that position.
Note: The ESA does not initiate the RF transmission.
Hexadecimal Value
87
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC G
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an ESA command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033F”); /*SSA-start of selected area*/
printf(“This area is selected for transmission”);
printf(“\033G”); /*ESA-end of selected area*/
See Also
SSA - Start of Selected Area (page 5-19) (which precedes an ESA command).
5 - 15
HTJ - Horizontal Tab with Justify
Function
HTJ shifts the characters between the preceding tab position and the left of the cursor position, up to the next tab
position. The screen cells to the left of the justified text will be space filled.
The cursor will also move to the left of the next tab stop. If the cursor was on a tab stop when the HTJ command
was received, the cursor will move to the next tab stop with no justification. This command will act on regular tabs
if they exist, otherwise it will act on default tabs. HTJ will not act on area tabs.
Hexadecimal Value
89
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC I
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an HTJ command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[5;5H”); /*CUP-move cursor to 5;5*/
printf(“\033H”); /*HTS-tab set*/
printf(“\033[5;12H”); /*CUP-move cursor to 5;12*/
printf(“\033H”); /*HTS-tab set*/
printf(“\033[5;5H”); /*CUP-move cursor to 5;5*/
sleep(10); /*Wait for user to enter data*/
printf(“\033I”); /*HTJ-justify data to the tab set*/
gets(s); /*Wait for user to press <Enter> and read in data*/
HTS - Horizontal Tabulation Set
Function
HTS sets a tab position at the cursor position.
Hexadecimal Value
88
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC H
Modes that affect this code
TSM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an HTS command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[4,20H”); /*CUP-move cursor to 4,20*/
printf(“\033H”); /*HTS-Set Tab Stop*/
5 - 16
IND - Index
Function
IND moves the cursor down one row without changing column position.
If the cursor is on the bottom row of the scrolling region, the display within the region will scroll up by one (1) row.
No scrolling occurs if the cursor is outside of the scrolling region.
Hexadecimal Value
84
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC D
Modes that affect this code
Scroll Region
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an IND command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033D”); /*Index-move down 1 row*/
NEL - Next Line
Function
NEL moves the cursor to the left margin on the next line.
If the cursor is on the bottom row of the scrolling region, the display within the region will scroll up by one (1) row.
No scrolling occurs if the cursor is outside of the scrolling region.
Hexadecimal Value
85
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC E
Modes that affect this code
Scroll Region
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an NEL command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033E”); /*NEL-down one line to the left margin*/
5 - 17
RI - Reverse Index
Function
RI moves the cursor up one line without changing the column position.
If the cursor is on the top row of the scrolling region, the display within the region will scroll down by one (1) row.
No scrolling occurs if the cursor is outside the scrolling region.
Hexadecimal Value
8D
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC M
Modes that affect this code
Scroll Region
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an RI command in the C programming language:
printf(“This prints on line 3.”);
printf(“\015”); /*Carriage Return. Move to column 1*/
printf(“\033M”); /*RI-move up 1 line*/
printf(“This prints on line 2.”);
SPA - Start of Protected Area
Function
SPA indicates the start of a string of character positions protected from alteration by the client and guarded
against transmission back to the host. This command is equivalent to DAQ 1.
Hexadecimal Value
96
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC V
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an SPA command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033V”); /*SPA*/
printf(“This is the start of a protected area\n”);
printf(“This is the end of a protected area”);
printf(“\033W”); /*EPA*/
See Also
EPA - End of Protected Area (page 5-14) (which follows the SPA command)
5 - 18
SSA - Start of Selected Area
Function
SSA indicates the start of a string of character positions selected for transmission back to the host. This command is similar to DAQ 8, except that SSA allows user input whereas DAQ 8 does not.
Note: The SSA does not initiate the RF transmission.
Hexadecimal Value
86
7-Bit Equivalent
ESC F
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an SSA command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033F”); /*SSA-start of selected area*/
printf(“This area is selected for transmission”);
printf(“\033G”); /*ESA-end of selected area*/
See Also
ESA - End of Selected Area (page 5-15) (which follows the SSA command)
5 - 19
ANSI Escape Sequences
This section provides information on coding ANSI escape sequences, which extend the functions available with the control
codes. If an ANSI escape sequence is not listed, Honeywell does not support it, and it is treated as a no operation (NOP).
CBT - Cursor Backward Tabulation
Function
CBT moves the cursor left, to the preceding tab position within the virtual screen.
If there are no tab stops before the cursor, it will jump to the lower right corner of the screen and continue looking backward for the next tab stop.
Note: The cursor will not tab to any protected screen cells.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnZ
where:
Pn is the number of tab positions the cursor moves to the left.
Z is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the movement of the cursor according to the value that you enter:
When you enter...
Then the cursor moves...
0
back one tab stop because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
back one tab stop.
a number greater than 1
back the number of tab stops the value indicates within the bounds of the virtual screen.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CBT command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[1;25H”); /*CUP-place cursor at row 1, column 25*/
printf(“\033H”); /*HTS-set tab set*/
printf(“\033[1;35H”); /*CUP-place cursor at row 1, column 35*/
printf(“\033[1Z”); /*CBT-move cursor back to tab set*/
5 - 20
CHA - Cursor Horizontal Absolute
Function
CHA moves the cursor to the column (on the current row) that the parameter indicates. If a number greater that 80 is
entered, the cursor will move to column 80 by default.
Note: Column number depends on the setting in Session Configuration.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnG
where:
Pn is the column number the cursor moves to.
G is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the cursor moves...
0
to column one because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
to column one.
a number greater than 1
to the column the value indicates in the current line.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CHA command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[7G”); /*move cursor to column 7 of the current line*/
5 - 21
CHT - Cursor Horizontal Tab
Function
CHT moves the cursor right, to the next tab position within the virtual screen. If there are no tab stops found after the
cursor, it will jump to the origin of the screen and continue looking for the next tab stop.
Note: The cursor will not tab to any protected screen cells.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnI
where:
Pn is the number of tab positions the cursor moves to the right.
I is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the cursor moves...
0
forward one tab position because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
forward one tab position.
a number greater than 1
forward the number of tab positions that the value indicates within the bounds of the
virtual screen
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CHT command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[1;25H”); /*CUP-place the cursor at row 1, column 25*/
printf(“\033H”); /*HTS-tab stop*/
printf(“\033[1;1H”); /*CUP-move cursor up to row 1, column 1*/
printf(“\033[1I”); /*CHT-place cursor horizontal tab*/
5 - 22
CNL - Cursor Next Line
Function
CNL moves the cursor down one or more lines to the left margin from the cursor’s current position. The cursor will stick
at the bottom margin if a large number is entered.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnE
where:
Pn is the number of lines the cursor moves down.
E is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the cursor moves...
0
to the left margin on the next line from its current position because the value defaults to
1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
to the left margin on the next line from its current position.
a number greater than 1
down, as many lines as the value indicates, to the left margin.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CNL command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[1;20H”); /*CUP-place cursor at row 1, column 20*/
printf(“\033[1E”); /*CNL-move cursor to next line, column 1*/
5 - 23
CPL - Cursor Preceding Line
Function
CPL moves the cursor up one or more lines to the left margin from the cursor’s current position. The cursor will stick at
the top margin if a large number is entered.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnF
where:
Pn is the number of lines the cursor moves up.
F is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the cursor moves...
0
up one line to the left margin because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
up one line to the left margin.
a number greater than 1
up, as many lines as the value indicates, to the left margin.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CPL command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[3;20H”); /*CUP-move the cursor to row 3, column 20*/
printf(“\033[2F”); /*CPL-move the cursor up 2 lines*/
5 - 24
CPR - Cursor Position Report
Function
CPR reports the cursor’s position to the host. DECOM is ignored when reporting the cursor position. The position
reported is always relative to the origin of the virtual screen.
Note: This report is sent from the client to the host in response to a device status report 6 (DSR 6)
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pr,PcR
where:
Pr is the row position.
Pc is the column position.
R is the final character.
Example
Refer to the following example of a CPR sent from the client to the host:
printf(“\033[2;5H”); /*CUP-Place cursor*/
printf(“\033[6n”); /*DSR-Request cursor position*/
gets(s); /*String returned= “\033[2;5R”*/
Note: This example requires that the [Enter] key is pressed to exit from the gets command.
Modes that affect this code
None
See Also
DSR - Device Status Report (page 5-37)
5 - 25
CTC - Cursor Tabulation Control
Function
CTC sets or clears the horizontal tab positions.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnW
where:
Pn is the tab position you want to set.
W is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s tab position:
When you enter...
Then this parameter value...
0 (default)
with TSM set, sets the tab stop at the cursor’s position.
with TSM reset, sets the tab stop at the cursor’s column, on all rows in the virtual screen.
1
Honeywell does not support this parameter value.
2
with TSM set, clears the tab stop at the cursor’s position.
with TSM reset, clears the tab stop at the cursor’s column, on all rows in the virtual screen.
3
Honeywell does not support this parameter value.
4
with TSM set, clears all of the tab stops on the cursor’s row in the virtual screen.
with TSM reset, clears all of the tab stops on the virtual screen.
5
with TSM set or reset, clears all of the tab stops on the virtual screen.
6
Honeywell does not support this parameter value.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CTC command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[5W”); /*clear all horizontal tab positions*/
5 - 26
CUB - Cursor Back
Function
CUB moves the cursor one or more positions to the left, up to the left margin. The cursor will stick at the left margin if
a large number is entered.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnD
where:
Pn is the number of character spaces the cursor moves to the left.
D is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the cursor moves...
0
to the left one space because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
to the left one space.
a number greater than 1
to the left the number of spaces the value indicates up to the left margin.
Each line contains 80 or 132 character positions depending on configuration.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
The following example illustrates how a programmer can format a CUB command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[4D”); /*CUB-move cursor back 4 spaces*/
5 - 27
CUD - Cursor Down
Function
CUD moves the cursor down one or more lines, without changing the cursor’s column position.
If the cursor is outside the scrolling region when this command is received, it will not move past the bottom of the virtual screen.
If the cursor is inside the scrolling region, it will not move past the bottom row of the scrolling region.
If Editing Boundary Mode (EBM) is set to the physical display, the scrolling region is ignored and the cursor will not
move past the bottom of the physical display.
Note: Scrolling does not occur with this command.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnB
where:
Pn is the number of lines the cursor moves down.
B is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the cursor moves...
0
down one line in the same column because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
down one line in the same column.
a number greater than 1
down the number of lines the value indicates without changing column position.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CUD command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[4B”); /*CUD-move cursor down 4 lines*/
5 - 28
CUF - Cursor Forward
Function
CUF moves the cursor forward (to the right) one or more spaces up to the right margin. The cursor will stick at the right
margin if a large number is entered.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnC
where:
Pn is the number of character positions the cursor moves to the right.
C is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the cursor moves...
0
one position to the right because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
one position to the right.
a number greater than 1
to the right the number of times the value indicates up to the right margin.
Each line contains 80 or 132 character positions depending on configuration.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CUF command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[4C”); /*CUF-moves cursor forward 4 spaces*/
5 - 29
CUP - Cursor Position Absolute
Function
CUP moves the cursor to a specified row/column position.
If the row or column positions are out of range, the client will adjust them and be within range of the appropriate display.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pr,PcH
where:
Pr is the row position.
Pc is the column position.
H is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the values that you can enter for CUP:
Parameter
Value
Pr
1-25
Pc
1-80
Line 25 is the status line.
If you enter 0 for Pr or Pc, the parameter defaults to 1.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CUP command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[3;17H”); /*CUP-move cursor to row 3, column 17*/
5 - 30
CUU - Cursor Up
Function
CUU moves the cursor up one or more lines, without changing the cursor’s column position.
Note: Scrolling does not occur with this command.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnA
where:
Pn is the number of lines the cursor moves up.
A is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the cursor moves...
0
up one line because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
up one line.
a number greater than 1
up the number of lines the value indicates up to the top of the virtual screen.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a CUU command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[4A”); /*CUU-move cursor up 4 lines*/
CVT - Cursor Vertical Tab
Function
CVT is processed the same as the Cursor Next Line command (CNL).
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnY
where:
Pn is the number of lines the cursor moves down.
Y is the final character.
Modes that affect this code
None
See
CNL for more details.
5 - 31
DAQ - Define Area Qualifications
Function
DAQ indicates that the cursor’s position is the start of a string of consecutive character positions that constitute a qualified area. The end of a qualified area is indicated by the beginning of the next qualified area. A qualified area restricts
the type of input the client user enters.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pno
where:
Pn indicates the type of data that the client accepts.
o is the final character.
Multiple parameters may be sent in a single DAQ command if they are separated by semi-colons.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the qualified area:
When you enter...
Then the qualified area...
0 (default)
accepts all data.
1
does not accept any input and is not selected to transmit.
Entering 1 for this value is equivalent to the 8-bit control code start of protected area (SPA)
discussed in C1 Codes: 8-Bit Control Codes.
2
accepts only displayable characters, 20-7E hex.
3
accepts only numeric characters.
4
accepts only alphabetic characters.
5
right justifies the data.
6
is filled with zeros.
7
has a horizontal tab stop set at the start of area.
8
does not accept any input, but it is selected to transmit.
9
is filled with spaces.
10
accepts input, but the characters are invisible.
15
accepts only keyboard input.
Every new DAQ command that the client receives will always overwrite the existing DAQ attribute type from the cursor
to the end of the area.
Note: Parameter types 6 and 9 are executed immediately and are not stored in the TE.
Rule
All DAQ parameters are supported in block mode. Parameters 0, 2, 3, 4 and 10 are supported in scroll mode. No
parameters are supported in character mode.
However, if multiple DAQ parameters are specified in a single command, they will combine as described in the table
below.
Parameter in
DAQ command
5 - 32
+
Previous
Parameter in
DAQ command
=
Parameter Stored in TE
All data (0)
+
any
=
All data
Guarded (1)
+
any
=
Guarded
Displayable (2)
+
any
=
Displayable
Numeric (3)
+
Alphabetic
=
Alphanumeric
Parameter in
DAQ command
+
Numeric (3)
+
Alphabetic (4)
Alphabetic (4)
Previous
Parameter in
DAQ command
=
Parameter Stored in TE
any other
=
Numeric
+
Numeric
=
Alphanumeric
+
any other
=
Alphabetic
Right Justify (5)
+
any
=
Previous+Right Justified
(If 5 is the only parameter received, the area will be an “All data,
right justified” one.)
Regular Tab (7)
+
any
=
All data+Regular Tab Stop
(Ignores TSM)
Selected (8)
+
any
=
Selected
For example, if the host specified ESC[1;5;0o, the client would mark the area as simply “All data” since 0 was the last
parameter. However, if the host specified ESC[3;4;5o, the client would mark the area as alpha-numeric and right justified.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a DAQ command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[1o”); /start of a protected area*/
printf(“Accept numeric character input only.\n”);
printf(“\033[3o”); /*Define numeric entry area start*/
printf(“____”); /*4 underscore characters*/
printf(“\033[1o”); /*define numeric entry area stop*/
printf(“\033[4D”); /*CUB-moves the cursor back 4 spaces*/
gets(s); /*string returned will be numeric value only*/
5 - 33
DCH - Delete Character
Function
DCH deletes the character(s) at the cursor position and shifts all the characters right of the cursor to the left (toward
the cursor).
The client will not delete past the first protected screen cell to the right of the cursor. If the cursor is on a protected cell
when the DCH command is received, it will move one position to the right (i.e. CUF 1). No deletion takes place in this
case.
Note: The vacated character position at the other end is erased.
Rule
Block mode must be enabled to use DCH.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnP
where:
Pn is the number of characters to delete.
P is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the effect the value that you enter has on the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the client...
0
deletes one character because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
deletes one character.
a number greater than 1
deletes the number of characters the value indicates.
Modes that affect this code
SEM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a DCH command in the C programming language:
printf(“All X's on this XX line will be deleted”);
printf(“\033[23D”); /*CUB-23 spaces back*/
printf(“\033[2P”); /*DCH-deletes 2 x's*/
printf(“\033[12D”); /*CUB-12 spaces back*/
printf(“\033[1P”); /*DCH-deletes x's remaining*/
5 - 34
DL - Delete Line
Function
DL deletes the line the cursor is in and shifts all following lines up. If the cursor is outside the scrolling region, this command is ignored.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnM
where:
Pn is the number of lines the device deletes.
M is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the number of lines the client deletes according to the value that you enter:
When you enter...
Then the client deletes...
0
one character because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
one line.
a number greater than 1
the number of lines the value indicates without going beyond the bottom of the virtual
screen or the scrolling region.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a DL command in the C programming language:
printf(“This line will be deleted.\n”);
printf(“This line will be deleted.\n”);
printf(“This line moves up and is not deleted.\n”);
printf(“\033[3A”); /*CUU-cursor moves up 3 lines*/
printf(“\033[2M”); /*DL-2 lines are deleted and remaining lines move up*/
5 - 35
DMI - Disable Manual Input
Function
DMI disables keyboard and RS-232 input. This command is equivalent to SM KAM.
Escape Sequence
ESC` (tilde)
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a DMI command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033`”); /* Keyboard and RS-232 now locked */
5 - 36
DSR - Device Status Report
Function
DSR requests information or reports information. DSR from the host requests information from the client receiving the
sequence (Pn = 5, 6). DSR from the client reports the status of the client (Pn = 0).
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pnn
where:
Pn is either a value that you enter (5 or 6) or it is a value returned from the client (0).
n is the final character.
Parameters Indicating a Request
Refer to the following table for the requests the host sends to a client according to the parameter value:
Note: Parameter 5 and 6 do not append a CR or LF to the response. Parameters 90, 92 and 93 append CR and LF
as if the [SEND] key was pressed.
Parameter
Report that the Host is Requesting
5
Status Report.
The client returns a CSI0n indicating ready status.
6
Cursor Position Report (CPR).
90
Sends the TE display, just as if the client user had pressed the [Enter] key.
92
Sends the TE display just as if the client user had pressed [Enter].
93
Same as 90, except the TE does not lock its keyboard.
94
Sends the upper left and lower right coordinates of the physical display in the format
CSI?UL Row;UL Col;LR Row,LR Col R
The coordinates are 1-based.
Note: DSR 90 - 94 are useful for debugging host applications.
Response to a CPR Request
The client sends a CPR response when the host requests a CPR. See CPR - Cursor Position Report (page 5-25).
Note: A carriage return (CR) and a line feed (LF) are not returned in the response to a CPR request.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a DSR command that requests a client to send a status report in C programming language:
printf(“\033[5n”);
gets (s); /*string returned is \033[0n for a ready status*/
Note: The example above requires that the [Enter] key be pressed at the client to exit from the gets command.
5 - 37
EA - Erase in Area
Function
EA erases characters in the qualified area where the active position (cursor’s position) resides according to the value
that you enter. This command will not erase the type of qualified area that the cursor is in.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnO
where:
Pn indicates what portion of the area is erased.
O is the final character.
Parameter Value
Refer to the following table on how characters are erased in the qualified area:
When you enter...
Then the client ...
0 (default)
erases characters from the cursor to the end of the qualified area.
1
erases characters from the start of the qualified area to the cursor.
2
erases all characters in the qualified area.
Modes that affect this code
ERM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an EA command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[6l”); /*Reset ERM*/
printf(“\033[1o”) /*DAQ-Start of protected area*/
printf(“This will not be erased.\n”);
printf(“\033[0o”); /*DAQ-Accepts all input*/
printf(“_ _ _ _ \033[1o”); /*DAQ-Accept no input*/
printf(“\033[4D”); /*CUB-4 spaces*/
printf(“\033[2O”); /*EA-Erase in Area-all*/
5 - 38
ECH - Erase Character
Function
ECH erases the character at the cursor’s position and possibly other characters to the right of the cursor, depending on
the value that you enter. If a large number of characters to erase is specified, the erase will continue on succeeding
lines.
Note: The active (cursor) position is unchanged.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnX
where:
Pn is the number of characters to erase.
X is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how the client erases characters according to the value that you enter:
When you enter...
Then the client ...
0
erases one character because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
erases one character.
a number greater than 1
erases the number of characters the value indicates.
Modes that affect this code
ERM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an ECH command in the C programming language:
printf(“This Z will be erased.”);
printf(“\015”); /*Carriage return*/
printf(“\033[5c”); /*Cursor forward 5 spaces*/
printf(“\033[1X”); /*Erase character Z*/
5 - 39
ED - Erase in Display
Function
ED erases some or all of the characters in the display according to the value that you enter. This command will erase
the type of qualified area that the cursor is in. It will also erase qualified area boundaries.
If EBM is set to the virtual screen, every row that is completely erased will have its line attribute reset to single high and
single wide.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnJ
where:
Pn indicates what portion of the display is erased.
J is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how the client erases characters according to the value that you enter:
When you enter...
Then the client ...
0 (default)
erases characters starting with the cursor position to the end of the display.
1
erases the characters from the start of the display to the cursor.
2
erases all the characters on the display. The cursor is moved to the origin of the physical
display or virtual screen, depending on the EBM setting.
Modes that affect this code
ERM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an ED command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[2J”); /*Erases entire display*/
5 - 40
EF - Erase in Field
Function
EF erases characters in the current field depending on the value that you enter. This command will not erase the type
of qualified area that the cursor is in.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnN
where:
Pn indicates what portion of the current field is erased.
N is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how the client erases characters in a field according to the value that you enter:
When you enter...
Then the client ...
0 (default)
erases characters from the cursor position to the end of the field.
1
erases characters from the beginning of the field to the cursor position.
2
erases the entire field that the cursor is in.
Modes that affect this code
EBM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an EF command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[5W”); /*CTC-Clear all tabs*/
printf(“\033[0W”); /*CTC-Set a tab*/
printf(“_ _ _ _ \033[0W”); /*CTC-Set a tab*/
printf(“\033[3D”); /*CUB-3 spaces*/
printf(“\033[2N”); /*EF-Erases all of field*/
5 - 41
EL - Erase in Line
Function
EL erases characters in the line the cursor is in according to the value that you enter. This command will erase the
type of qualified area that the cursor is in. It will also erase qualified area boundaries.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnK
where:
Pn indicates what portion of the current line is erased.
K is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how the client erases characters according to the value that you enter:
When you enter...
Then the client ...
0 (default)
erases characters from the cursor position to the end of line.
1
erases characters from the beginning of the line to the cursor.
2
erases the entire line that the cursor is in.
Modes that affect this code
ERM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an EL command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[6l”); /*Reset ERM*/
printf(“\033[1o”); /*DAQ-Start of protected area*/
printf(“This will not be erased.\n”);
printf(“\033[0o”); /*DAQ-Accepts all input*/
printf(“_ _ _ _ \033[1o”); /*DAQ-Accepts no input*/
printf(“\033[4D”); /*CUB-4 spaces*/
printf(“\033[2K”); /*Erase in Line*/
5 - 42
EMI - Enable Manual Input
Function
EMI enables keyboard and RS-232 input. This command is equivalent to RM KAM.
Escape Sequence
ESCb
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an EMI command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033b”); /* Keyboard and RS-232 now unlocked */
HVP - Horizontal Vertical Position
Function
HVP moves the cursor to the specified row/column position. HVP is the same as the CUP command in Legacy clients.
Refer to the CUP command for more details. See CUP - Cursor Position Absolute (page 5-30).
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pr,Pcf
where:
Pr is the row position.
Pc is the column position.
f is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the values that you can enter for HVP:
Parameter
Value
Pr
1 - 25(Line 25 is the status line.)
Pc
1 - 80
If you enter 0 for Pr or Pc, the parameter defaults to 1.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an HVP command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[3;17f”); /*Move the cursor to row 3, column 17*/
5 - 43
ICH - Insert Character
Function
ICH shifts all characters from the cursor to the right and inserts a space character at the cursor position.
The client will not insert past the first protected screen cell to the right of the cursor. If the cursor is on a protected cell
when this command is received, it will move one position to the right (i.e. CUF 1). No insertion takes place in this
case.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pn@
where:
Pn is the number of character spaces the cursor shifts to the right.
@ is the final character.
Rule
Block mode must be enabled for ICH to work.
Parameter Values
Refer to the table below on how the characters move according to the value that you enter:
When you enter...
Then the client shifts the characters...
0
one space to the right because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
one space to the right.
a number greater than 1
the number of spaces the value indicates to the right.
Modes that affect this code
SEM
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an ICH command in the C programming language:
printf(“Insert space here”);
printf(“\015”); /*CR-carriage return*/
printf(“\033[6C”); /*CUF-cursor forward*/
printf(“\033[1@”); /*ICH-insert space character*/
printf(“\033[1C”); /*CUF-cursor forward*/
printf(“\033[1@”); /*ICH-insert space character*/
5 - 44
IL - Insert Line
Function
IL inserts one or more blank lines at the cursor’s position and shifts all following lines down. If the cursor is outside the
scrolling region, this command is ignored.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnL
where:
Pn is the number of blank lines inserted at the cursor’s position.
L is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how to insert blank lines at the cursor’s position:
When you enter...
Then the client inserts...
0
one blank line because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
one blank line.
a number greater than 1
the number of blank lines the value indicates at the cursor’s position. The inserted lines
do not go beyond the bottom of the virtual screen or the scrolling region.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an IL command in the C programming language:
printf(“This line will move down 2 lines.”);
printf(“\015”); /*CR-carriage return*/
printf(“\033[2L”); /*Insert 2 lines*/
5 - 45
MC - Media Copy
Function
MC enables or disables the RS-232 port. When enabled, the client sends received characters to the RS-232 port without displaying them on the screen. All characters (except: Nul, XON, XOFF, DC4, DC2, CSI5i and CSI4i) are sent to
the port. When disabled, the client sends received chars to the display. MC has a higher priority than autoprint mode.
Note: An alternative way to disable MC is to send a DC4.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pni
where:
Pn indicates whether the RS-232 port is off or on.
i is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the table below on how to enable or disable the RS-232 port:
When you enter...
Then the RS-232 port is ...
4
off.
5
on.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an MC command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[5i”); /*Enables following text to copy to the RS-232 port*/
printf(“This message will copy to the RS-232 port.”);
printf(“\033[4i”); /*Disables RS-232 port*/
5 - 46
REP - Repeat Character
Function
REP repeats the last character transmitted by the host the number of times indicated by the value. Only characters are
repeated. Escape sequences are not repeated.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pnb
where:
Pn is the number of times a character is repeated.
b is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the table below on how many times the character is repeated according to the value that you enter:
When you enter...
Then the client repeats the character ...
0
once because the value defaults to 1 when you enter 0.
1 (default)
once.
a number greater than 1
the number of time that the value indicates.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an REP command in the C programming language:
printf(“The number 3 is repeated:\n);
printf(“4 times-3”);
printf(“\033[4b”); /*repeat 4 times*/
5 - 47
RM - Reset Mode
Function
RM resets one or more modes for the device indicated by the value that you enter. Several modes can be reset with
the same command if the parameter values are separated by semicolons. They can be sent in any order except #3.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pn1
where:
Pn indicates which mode to reset.
l (lower-case L) is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the modes RM resets:
Parameter
Mode to Reset
Description
1
Guarded Area Transfer
Mode (GATM)
Enables the client to transmit only the unguarded areas to the host and
auxiliary device. Refer to Sending the Client Screen to the Host (page 52) for more details.
2
Keyboard Action Mode
(KAM)
Unlocks the keyboard and RS-232 data entry.
4
Insert-Replace Mode
(IRM)
Enables the client to replace the information during editing by overwriting
the content of the line.
6
Erasure Mode (ERM)
Determines that the editing commands such as EA cannot erase protected
characters.
12
Send-Receive Mode
(SRM)
Enables local echo in the client so that the client operates in scroll or block
mode. Character mode communication is disabled.
15
Multiple Area Transmit
Mode (MATM)
Enables the client to transmit only the selected area containing the cursor.
Refer to Sending the Client Screen to the Host (page 5-2) for more details.
17
Selected Area
Transmit Mode (SATM)
Enables the client to transmit only the selected areas. Refer to Sending
the Client Screen to the Host (page 5-2) for more details.
18
Tab Stop Mode (TSM)
Determines that the tab stop settings affect the entire virtual display.
20
Line Feed/New Line
Mode (LNM)
Enables the client to perform only a line feed while the cursor remains in
its current column.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an RM command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[4l”)/*reset IRM*/
See Also
Refer to SM - Set Mode (page 5-50) for more information on how to set the modes discussed in the previous table.
5 - 48
SEM - Select Editing Extent Mode
Function
SEM indicates the extent to which the delete character (DCH) command and the insert character (ICH) command
affect the display window.
Escape Sequence
ESC[PnQ
where:
Pn indicates how much of the display window is affected by the editing commands.
Q is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the affect that SEM has on the DCH and ICH editing commands:
When you enter...
Then DCH and ICH commands affect...
0 (default)
the entire display.
1
only the row the cursor is in.
2
only the field containing the cursor (between horizontal tab stops).
3
only the selected area containing the cursor (defined by DAQ, SPA and EPA).
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an SEM command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[3Q”); /*SEM-3*/
See Also
Refer to DAQ - Define Area Qualifications (page 5-32) for more information on define area qualification. Refer to EPA
- End of Protected Area (page 5-14) and SPA - Start of Protected Area (page 5-18) for more information on end of protected area and select protected area.
5 - 49
SM - Set Mode
Function
SM sets one or more modes for the client as specified by the parameter. Several modes can be set with the same
command if the parameter values are separated by semicolons. They can be sent in any order except #3.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pnh
where:
Pn indicates the mode to set.
h is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the modes SM sets:
Parameter
Mode to Set
Description
1
Guarded Area Transfer
Mode (GATM)
Enables the client to transmit the entire screen to the host or auxiliary
device. Refer to Sending the Client Screen to the Host (page 5-2) for
more details.
2
Keyboard Action Mode
(KAM)
Locks the keyboard and RS-232 data entry. The keyboard cannot be
unlocked from the client.
3
Control Representation
Mode (CRM)
Enables the client to display the control codes. This parameter value
must immediately precede the final character.
4
Insert-Replace Mode
(IRM)
Enables the client to insert the information while the contents of the line
shift to the right.
6
Erasure Mode (ERM)
Determines that the editing commands such as EA can erase protected
characters.
12
Send-Receive Mode
(SRM)
Disables local echo in the client so that the client operates in character
mode. Scroll or block mode communication is disabled.
15
Multiple Area Transmit
Mode (MATM)
Enables the client to transmit all selected areas. Refer to Sending the
Client Screen to the Host (page 5-2) for more details.
17
Selected Area Transmit
Mode (SATM)
Enables the client to transmit the entire virtual screen. Refer to Sending
the Client Screen to the Host (page 5-2) for more details.
18
Tab Stop Mode (TSM)
Determines that the tab stop settings only affect the cursor’s row.
20
Line Feed/New Line
Mode (LNM)
Enables the client to perform a line feed and carriage return, placing the
cursor at the beginning of the next line.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an SM command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[4h”); /*Set IRM*/
See Also
RM - Reset Mode (page 5-48) (for more information on how to reset the modes discussed in the previous table).
5 - 50
TBC - Tab Clear
Function
TBC clears one or more tab stops according to the value that you enter.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Png
where:
Pn is the type of tab stops to clear.
g is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how TBC affects the tab stop positions:
When you enter...
Then the parameter value ...
0 (default)
with TSM set, clears the tab stop at the cursor’s position.
with TSM reset, clears the tab stop at the cursor’s column on all rows in the virtual screen.
1
Honeywell does not support this parameter.
2
with TSM set, clears all of the tab stops on the cursor’s row in the virtual screen.
3
with TSM set or reset, clears all of the tab stops on the virtual screen.
4
Honeywell does not support this parameter.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a TBC command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[0g”); /*Clear tab stop*/
5 - 51
DEC Private Escape Sequences
This section provides information for the programmer on how to code DEC private escape sequences for Honeywell equipment.
All the private escape sequences supported by Honeywell are listed in this section. If a DEC private escape sequence is not
listed, Honeywell does not support it, and it is treated as a no operation (NOP).
APM - Auto Print Mode
Function
APM turns auto print mode on or off. When auto print is on, the virtual screen row that the cursor is presently on prints
when the cursor is moved off the line with a line feed, form feed, vertical tab or auto wrap. The printed line ends with a
carriage return and a line feed. Trailing spaces on a screen row will not print.
Escape Sequence
ESC[?Pni
where:
Pn is the parameter value that indicates on or off.
i is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on the parameter values indicating the mode to set:
When you enter...
Auto Print mode is turned ...
4 (default)
off.
5
on.
Modes that affect this code
None
DECRM - DEC Reset Mode
Function
DECRM resets the mode you choose.
Escape Sequence
ESC[?Pnl
where:
? is a constant.
Pn is the value of the mode to reset.
l (lowercase L) is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the modes DECRM can reset:
Parameter
Mode to Reset
Description
18
Print Form Feed Mode
(DECPFF)
Disables the terminating character (form feed) after print screen
operations. (Print full screen or scroll region with the PS command.)
19
Print Extent Mode
(DECPEX)
Selects the scrolling region to print for each Print Screen (PS) command
issued.
Modes that affect this code
None
5 - 52
DECSCA - Select Character Attribute
Function
DECSCA indicates the start of a protected or unprotected string of character positions.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pn"q
where:
Pn is the parameter value that indicates the character attribute.
" and q are the final characters.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on the parameter values indicating the character attribute as protected or unprotected:
When you enter...
Then the character(s) is ..
0 (default)
unprotected.
This is the same as the EPA command.. See EPA - End of Protected Area
(page 5-14).
1
protected.
This is the same as the SPA command. See SPA - Start of Protected Area
(page 5-18).
2
unprotected.
This parameter has the same effect as parameter 0.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the example below on how a programmer can format a DECSCA command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[1\”q”);
printf(“This text is
printf(“\033[0\”q”);
printf(“This text is
/*DECSCA-1 cannot erase*/
protected from erasure.\n”);
/*DECSCA-0 can erase*/
not protected.”);
5 - 53
DECSED - Selective Erase in Display
Function
DECSED enables the programmer to erase some or all of the erasable characters in the display. This command will
not erase qualified area boundaries or the type of qualified area the cursor is in.
If EBM is set to the virtual screen, every row that is completely erased will have its line attribute reset to single high and
single wide.
Escape Sequence
ESC[?PnJ
where:
? is a constant.
Pn is the portion of the display to erase.
J is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how the characters are erased according to the value that you enter:
When you enter...
Then the characters are erased from ...
0 (default)
the cursor through the end of the display.
1
the beginning of the display through the cursor.
2
the entire display. The cursor is moved to the origin of the physical or virtual display
depending on the EBM setting.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the example below on how a programmer can format a DECSED command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[0\”q”); /*DECSCA = 0*/
printf(“Text from this letter x to the end of \n”);
printf(“the display should be erased.\n”);
printf(“\033[2A”); /*CUU-Cursor up 2 lines*/
printf(“\033[22C”); /*CUF-Cursor Forward 22 to the x*/
printf(“\033[?0J”); /*Erase from x to the end of the display*/
5 - 54
DECSEL - Selective Erase in Line
Function
DECSEL enables the programmer to erase some or all of the erasable characters in a single line of text. This command will not erase qualified area boundaries or the type of qualified area the cursor is in.
Escape Sequence
ESC[?PnK
where:
? is a constant.
Pn is the portion of the line to erase.
K is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how the characters are erased in relation to the cursor:
When you enter...
Then the characters are erased from ...
0 (default)
the cursor through the end of the line.
1
the beginning of the line through the cursor.
2
the entire line.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the example below on how a programmer can format a DECSEL command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[0\”q”); /*DECSCA = 0*/
printf(“Text from this letter x to the end of \n”);
printf(“the above line should be erased.\n”);
printf(“\033[2A”); /*CUU-Cursor up 2 lines*/
printf(“\033[22C”); /*CUF-Cursor forward 22*/
printf(“\033[0K”); /*Erase from x to the end of the line*/
5 - 55
DECSM - DEC Set Mode
Function
DECSM sets the mode you choose.
Escape Sequence
ESC[?Pnh
where:
? is a constant.
Pn is the value of the mode to set.
h is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the modes that DECSM can set:
Parameter
Mode to Reset
Description
18
Print Form Feed Mode
(DECPFF)
Enables the terminating character (form feed) after print screen
operations. (Print full screen with the PS command.)
19
Print Extent Mode
(DECPEX)
Selects the full screen to print for each Print Screen (PS) command
issued.
Modes that affect this code
None
5 - 56
DECDHL - Double-Height Line
Function
Makes the line with the cursor on it the top or bottom half of a double-height, double-width line. Pairs of this command
must be used on adjacent lines.
The same screen character must be used on both the top and bottom lines in that column to form a full character.
Note: When this command is received, the device will reset the right half of the virtual screen to spaces and remove
any tabs or areas contained there. If the cursor is in the right half, it will be moved to the last column in the left
half.
Top Half
Escape Sequence
ESC#3
Modes that affect this code
None
Bottom Half
Escape Sequence
ESC#4
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a DECDHL command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033#3 Double High Line\n”);
printf(“\033#4 Double High Line\n”);
5 - 57
DECDWL - Double-Width Line
Function
Makes the line with the cursor on it double-width, single-height.
Note: When this command is received, the device will reset the right half of the virtual screen to spaces and remove
any tabs or areas contained there. If the cursor is in the right half, it will be moved to the last column in the left
half.
Escape Sequence
ESC#6
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a DECDWL command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033#6 Double-Width Line\n”);
G0/G1/G2/G3 - Designate G0/G1/G2/G3
Function
G0 designates one of the hard character sets (ASCII, DEC Supplemental Graphics, DEC Special Graphics, and
National Replacement character sets) as G0 through G3.
Escape Sequence
To Designate
ESC(F
G0
ESC)F
G1
ESC*F
G2
ESC+F
G3
where:
F is the final character from the following table.
Character set to
designate...
Final character...
ASCII
B
DEC Supplemental
<
DEC Special Graphics
0
National Replacement
Character Sets
various final characters dependent upon mobile device operating system and device
specific settings
For more information, refer to DEC Special Graphics - Code Table (page 6-10).
5 - 58
PL - Print Line
Function
PL prints the display line containing the cursor. A carriage return and line feed are automatically printed after the line.
Escape Sequence
ESC[?1i
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a PL command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[?1i”); /*Prints the line the cursor is on*/
PS - Print Screen
Function
PS prints the display to the RS-232 port. A carriage return and line feed is automatically printed after each line.
Escape Sequence
ESC[Pni
where:
Pn is either 0 or omitted.
Modes that affect this code
DECPEX, DECPFF
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a PS command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[0i”); /*Causes the display to be printed*/
S7C1T - Select 7-Bit C1 Control Transmission
Function
S7C1T informs the client to convert all C1 codes to their 7-bit equivalent before sending them back to the host.
Note: The client will always accept either 7-bit or 8-bit control codes regardless of the state of this command.
Escape Sequence
ESC sp F
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a S7C1T command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033 F”); /*There is a single space between the 3 and the F*/
5 - 59
S8C1T - Select 8-Bit C1 Control Transmission
Function
S8C1T informs the client to send all C1 codes back to the host without converting them to their 7-bit equivalent.
Note: The client will always accept either 7-bit or 8-bit control codes regardless of the state of this command.
Escape Sequence
ESC sp G
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format a S8C1T command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033 G”); /*There is a single space between the 3 and the G*/
SI - Shift In (Lock Shift G0)
Function
Invokes G0 character set into GL.
Hexadecimal Value
Control Code
0F
^O
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an SI command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033(0”); /* Designate DEC special graphics into G0. */
printf(“\017”); /* Shift G0 into GL */
printf(“lqqk\n”); /* These two lines print a small box on the display.
printf(“mqqj”);
*/
SO - Shift Out (Lock Shift G1)
Function
Invokes G1 character set into GL.
Hexadecimal Value
Control Code
0E
^N
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an SO command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033)0”); /* Designate DEC special graphics into G1. */
printf(“\016”); /* Shift G1 into GL */
printf(“lqqk\n”); /* These two lines print a small box on the display.
printf(“mqqj”);
5 - 60
*/
Private Escape Sequences
Honeywell offers special escape sequences as well as command strings that modify terminal emulation functions, window
parameters, and wild card local edit characters. Honeywell also provides command strings for stored forms, using a backspace
function with the [CLEAR] key, enabling an echo suppress, and a wide range of beep patterns.
This section describes the applications for each command string and information on how the programmer can code the escape
sequences and command strings.
LXERM - Reset Mode
Function
LXERM resets the mode that you choose.
Escape Sequence
ESC[=Pnl
where:
= is a constant.
Pn is the value of the mode to reset.
l (lowercase L) is the final character.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the modes LXERM can reset:
Parameter
Mode to Reset
Description
1
Scroll/Block
Mode (LXELM)
Enables block mode.
Rule: Send-receive mode (SRM) must be reset for LXELM to work.
2
New Line Echo
Mode (LXENE)
Disables new line local echo. If the client is in scroll/block mode, does not
execute carriage return and line feed to the client display when the [Enter] key is
pressed.
3
Autosend
(LXEAS)
Disables autosend. In other words, the client transmits only when the [Enter] key
is pressed.
Rule: Send-receive mode (SRM) must be reset for LXEAS to work.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an LXERM command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[=3l”); /*Reset LXEAS- Reset autosend mode*/
5 - 61
LXESM - Set Mode
Function
LXESM sets the mode you choose.
Escape Sequence
ESC=Pnh
where:
= is a constant.
Pn is the value of the mode to set.
h is the final letter.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table for the modes LXESM can set:
Parameter
Mode to Set
Description
1
Scroll/Block
Mode (LXELM)
Enables scroll mode.
Rule: Send-receive mode (SRM) must be reset for LXELM to work.
2
New Line Echo
Mode (LXENE)
Enables new line local echo. If the client is in scroll/block mode, execute carriage
return and line feed to the client display when the [Enter] key is pressed.
3
Autosend
(LXEAS)
Enables autosend. In other words, the client transmits the screen when the last
field is filled with a bar code entry, keyboard entry or RS-232 port entry.
Rule: Send-receive mode (SRM) must be reset for LXEAS to work.
Modes that affect this code
None
Example
Refer to the following example on how a programmer can format an LXESM command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[=3h”); /*Set LXEAS-Set autosend mode*/
5 - 62
Scanner Enable / Disable
Function
Enable or disable scanner input.
Disable Scanner
The scanner is disabled when this command is used:
• For devices with an internal or tethered scanner, the scan trigger is disabled.
• For devices with a tethered scanner, serial input received from the scanner is rejected and an error sound is
produced.
Escape Sequence
ESC%0
Modes that affect this code
None
Enable Scanner
This command enables the scanner after it has been disabled with the command above.
Escape Sequence
ESC%1
Modes that affect this code
None
Keyboard Enable / Disable
Function
Enable or disable keyboard input.
Disable Keyboard
The keyboard is disabled when this command is used. Any keystrokes entered are ignored and an error sound is produced.
Escape Sequence
ESC%0
Modes that affect this code
None
Enable Keyboard
This command enables the keyboard after it has been disabled with the command above.
Escape Sequence
ESC%1
Modes that affect this code
None
5 - 63
Enable/Disable Bar Code Symbologies
The host computer can be used to enable or disable scanning of specified bar code symbologies. If a bar code symbology is
disabled with this feature, the scanner does not recognize that symbology. The scanner sounds a bad scan beep (double beep
sound is the default) when trying to scan the disabled symbologies. Use the following example and table of values to see how a
programmer can enable or disable symbologies with a command in the C programming language:
printf(“\033[xx+A”); /*Substitute the applicable xx value from the chart to enable or disable
symbology*/
Set xx to:
Perform this action
65 (0x41)
Enable Code 39
66 (0x42)
Disable Code 39
67 (0x43)
Enable Interleaved 2of5
68 (0x44)
Disable Interleaved 2of5
75 (0x4B)
Enable Codabar/Ames
76 (0x4C)
Disable Codabar/Ames
77 (0x4D)
Enable MSI
78 (0x4E)
Disable MSI
79 (0x4F)
Enable Code 93
80 (0x50)
Disable Code 93
81 (0x51)
Enable Code 128
82 (0x52)
Disable Code 128
85 (0x55)
Enable UPC-A
86 (0x56)
Disable UPC-A
87 (0x57)
Enable UPC-E
88 (0x58)
Disable UPC-E
89 (0x59)
Enable EAN/JAN
90 (0x5A)
Disable EAN/JAN
Specifying Bar Code, Keypad and Control Modes
This section discusses the elements of the command string that enable the programmer to set the bar code, keypad and control
modes for the client. The different settings for each parameter of the command string are discussed in detail.
Command String for Bar Code, Keypad and Control Modes
The programmer can specify bar code, keypad and control modes with the appropriate command string. This section discusses elements of the command string and its structure.
Command String
Use the following command string for specifying bar code, keypad, and control modes:
CSIc1;p1;p2;p3;p4;p5;p6;p7;p8;p9;p10+E
Rule
Each parameter must be preceded by a semicolon (;).
You can use the semicolon as a placeholder if you want to change only one parameter. For example, you can send the
following string to change only p5 of the command string:
CSI1;;;;;1+E
5 - 64
String Elements
The following table describes the different elements of the command string for specifying bar code, keypad, and control
modes:
String
Element
Description
CSI
ANSI control sequence introducer (Hex 9B for 8-bit code or Hex 1B5B for 7-bit code).
c1
A compatibility byte that ensures the terminal emulation understands the command string sent to it.
The c1 is a revision level character for compatibility purposes, which increments with each revision.
The original value for this parameter is 1.
;
A required delimiter that must precede all parameter entries.
p2
Bar Code/RS-232 Input Left Justify Mode
0 = Left Justify Mode Off
1 = Left Justify Mode On
Left Justify Mode: p2 (page 5-65) discusses this parameter in more detail.
p3
Bar Code/RS-232 Input Clear Mode
0 = Clear Off
1 = Clear On
Clear Mode: p3 (page 5-66) discusses this parameter in more detail.
p4
Bar Code/RS-232 Input Truncate Mode
0 = Truncate Off
1 = Truncate On
Truncate Mode: p4 (page 5-66) discusses this parameter in more detail.
p5
Bar Code/RS-232 Input Advance Mode
0 = Advance Off
1 = Advance On
Advance Mode: p5 (page 5-67) discusses this parameter in more detail.
+E
The final characters of the ANSI command string. This combination indicates the end of the command
string and identifies the command string as a bar code, keypad, and control mode command.
Left Justify Mode: p2
Left justify mode determines where the cursor appears in a field from one bar code entry to the next. The programmer
must decide if the cursor in a field justifies to the left each time a new bar code entry occurs or if the bar code entry appears
at the end of the previous entry.
Rule
You must enable block mode to use left justify mode.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how to set p2 of the command string to disable or enable left justify mode:
When you enter ...
Then left justify is ...
0
off
1 (default)
on
Left Justify Off
Left Justify Off enables a bar code read to appear in the next available cursor position of a field directly following a previous bar code entry. For example, the first bar code entry fills the first five positions of the first field available as shown
below:
The next bar code read is entered starting at the cursor’s position and proceeding to the next unprotected field.
5 - 65
Left Justify On
Left Justify On enables the cursor to left justify in a field each time a bar code read occurs. For example, the following
bar code read appears in the field and then the cursor left justifies when the next bar code entry occurs. The next bar
code read appears in the field starting at the B position:
Clear Mode: p3
Clear mode determines if a field is automatically cleared when the next bar code entry occurs or if the data in the field is
overwritten by the new entry.
Note: If a field is not cleared after the data is transmitted to the host, there is a chance that some of the previous data will
not be completely overwritten by the new entry. If the data is not completely overwritten, it appears at the end of the
new entry and is transmitted with the new entry to the host.
Rule
You must enable block mode to use clear mode.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how to set p3 of the command string to disable or enable clear mode:
When you enter ...
Then clear mode is ...
0
off
1 (default)
on
Clear Mode Off
When clear mode is off, the client does not clear the data in a field. The new data entered overwrites portions of the
left-over data. An operation that has bar code entries with equal character lengths might choose clear mode off.
Clear Mode On
When clear mode is on, the client clears the data entered in a field each time a new bar code entry occurs. An operation that has bar code entries with varying lengths would need to use clear mode on to ensure accurate transmission of
each entry.
Truncate Mode: p4
Truncate mode determines whether the character positions of a bar code entry that exceeds the field length are simply
dropped off or if the leftover characters are entered in the next available field.
Rule
You must enable block mode to use truncate mode.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how to set p4 of the command string to disable or enable truncate mode:
When you enter ...
Then truncate mode is ...
0
off
1 (default)
on
Truncate Mode Off
When truncate mode is off, the character positions of a bar code entry exceeding the field length are entered in the
next available field. An operation that has two kinds of information in one bar code entry would use truncate mode off
so that one bar code read can fill two fields on a form.
5 - 66
Truncate Mode On
When truncate mode is on, the character positions of a bar code entry exceeding the field length are dropped off. If the
field has 10 available character positions and the bar code entry has 22, the first 10 character positions of the entry are
entered in the field and the remaining 12 character positions are dropped. An operation that wants to ensure that a bar
code entry from one field is not carried over into the next field would want to have truncate mode on.
Advance Mode: p5
Advance mode determines whether the cursor advances to the next field at the end of a bar code entry. If the cursor does
not advance to the next field, the next bar code entry is entered at the end of the previous bar code entry.
Rule
You must enable block mode to use advance mode.
Parameter Values
Refer to the following table on how to set p5 of the command string to disable or enable advance mode:
When you enter ...
Then advance mode is ...
0
off
1 (default)
on
Advance Mode Off
When advance mode is off, the cursor does not advance to the next field at the end of a bar code entry. The next bar
code entry is entered directly following the previous bar code entry.
Advance Mode On
When advance mode is on, the cursor advances to the next field at the end of each entry regardless of whether the
field is completely filled or not. An operation that has bar code entries that do not always fill the field would use
advance mode on.
If autosend (LXEAS) is also enabled, the client will automatically send the screen even if the last bar code entry did not
completely fill the last field on the display.
Specifying Transmit and Screen Function Setup
Command String for Transmit and Screen Function Setup
You must specify the transmit and screen function setup with the appropriate command string. This section discusses elements of the command string and its structure.
Command String
Use the following command string for the transmit and screen function setup:
CSIc1;p1;p2;p3;p4;p5;p6;p7;p8;p9;p10+F
Rule
Each parameter must be preceded by a semicolon (;).
You can use the semicolon as a placeholder if you want to change only one parameter. For example, you can send the
following string to change only p5 of the command string:
CSI1;;;;;1+F
5 - 67
String Elements
The following table describes the different elements of the command string for the transmit and screen function setup:
String
Element
5 - 68
Description
Related Sections
CSI
ANSI control sequence introducer (Hex 9B for 8-bit code or hex 1B5B for 7bit code).
-
c1
A compatibility byte that ensures the terminal emulation understands the
command string sent to it. The c1 is a revision level character for
compatibility purposes, which increments with each revision. The original
value for this parameter is 1.
-
;
A required delimiter that must precede all parameter entries.
-
p1
Not used.
p2
8-Bit Code control from the host.
The client can always accept either 7-bit or 8-bit codes from the host. The
value of this parameter is therefore ignored.
8-Bit Code Table (page
5-4)
p3
Auto Transmit Mode
0 = Auto Transmit Mode is OFF. The [Enter] key must be pressed to
transmit the data.
1 = Auto Transmit Mode is ON. The data is automatically transmitted when
the last field is filled with a bar code entry, an RS-232 port entry or keyboard
entry.
LXEAS, see:
LXERM - Reset Mode
(page 5-61)
LXESM - Set Mode
(page 5-62)
p4
LF Transmission on Send
0 = The [Enter] key places a carriage return in the data stream.
1 = The [Enter] key places a carriage return and line feed in the data
stream.
LNM, see:
RM - Reset Mode (page
5-48)
SM - Set Mode (page 550)
p5
Screen Mode
0 = Screen Mode is Block Mode.
1 = Screen Mode is Scroll Mode.
LXELM, see:
LXERM - Reset Mode
(page 5-61)
LXESM - Set Mode
(page 5-62)
p6
New Line Echo Mode
0 = New Line Echo Mode OFF.
1 = New Line Echo Mode ON.
LXENE, see:
LXERM - Reset Mode
(page 5-61)
LXESM - Set Mode
(page 5-62)
p7
Auto Wrap Mode
0 = Auto Wrap Mode OFF.
1 = Auto Wrap Mode ON.
DECAWM
p8
On Line Mode
0 = Operate in On Line Mode. The [Enter] key is enabled to send
messages to the host through the RF link.
1 = Operate in Local Mode. The [Enter] key is disabled.
-
p9
Not used.
p10
Transmit Mode
0 = Transmit in Block or Scroll Mode.
1 = Transmit in Character Mode.
SRM, see:
RM - Reset Mode (page
5-48)
SM - Set Mode (page 550)
+F
The final character of the ANSI command string. This combination
indicates the end of the command string and identifies the command string
as a transmit and screen function mode.
-
Local Edit Commands
Local edit commands enable a programmer to control data entry from the client. This section discusses the two types of local
edit commands and the command string elements for each.
Command String for Local Edit Match Field
A local edit match field restricts user data entry to exact match values or ranges of accepted values. A programmer can
use this feature to prevent incorrect part number or bin location entries.
Definitions
An exact match field is a field with predetermined values that must be matched exactly by user entry.
Local edit match field is a feature provided by Honeywell that enables the client to perform data comparisons between
the match buffer in the client and the data entered by the client user. In other words, the client locally edits information
as the client user enters data instead of the host performing the edit.
A match buffer is an area of memory used by the local edit match field command to restrict data entry by the client
user.
Rules
Refer to the following rules for using local edit match field:
• You must specify a local edit field by placing the cursor at the beginning of the appropriate field and sending the
correct command string.
• You must place match data between two identical Honeywell local edit command strings.
• You must enable Local echo. Refer to RM - Reset Mode (page 5-48) (parameter value 12) in this manual for more
information on local echo.
• You must enable block mode. If character mode or scroll mode is enabled, local edit match fields are ignored.
• Use characters entered into the match buffer field that do not match the local edit wildcard symbols (defaults: ?, $,
#, +, *) as exact match characters.
Command String
Use the following command string for specifying a local edit match field:
CSId+A
String Elements
The following table describes the different elements of the command string for specifying a local edit match field:
String
Element
Description
CSI
ANSI control sequence introducer (Hex 9B for 8-bit code or Hex 1B5B for 7-bit code).
d
Keyboard Input
0 (default) = Display the keyboard input if user entry matches the requirements of the match buffer.
1 = Do not display the keyboard input if user entry matches the requirements of the match buffer. Host
input on these cells is displayed.
+A
The final character of the ANSI command sequence. This combination indicates the end of the
command string and identifies the command string as a local edit match field.
Example
Refer to the following example of a local edit match field command:
printf(“ _ _ _ _ _ _ ”); /*6 character fields*/
printf(“\033[6D”); /*CUB-move cursor back 6*/
printf(“\033[0+A”); /*turn on local edit setup mode*/
printf(“P?$$$$”); /*part number format*/
printf(“\033[0+A”); /*turn off local edit setup mode*/
printf(“\033[6D”); /*CUB-move cursor back 6*/
gets(s) /*wait for user to enter data*/
5 - 69
Command String for Local Edit Wildcard
Local edit wildcard enables the programmer to change the default match symbols. Wildcard match values represent a
range of acceptable user input. The host may change the definition of a particular wildcard at any time without affecting any
previously set local edit match fields. (The TE stores the type of wildcard rather than the actual wildcard value.)
Command String
Use the following command string for local edit wildcard:
CSIc1;p1;p2;p3;p4;p5;p6+G
Rule
The values you enter for the symbols must be in their decimal equivalent forms. Refer to the 8-Bit Code Table (page 54) for these decimal values.
You can use the semicolon as a placeholder if you want to change only one parameter. For example, you can send the
following string to change only p5 of the command string:
CSI1;;;;;1+G
String Elements
The following table describes the different elements of the command string for specifying a local edit wildcard:
String
Element
Description
CSI
ANSI control sequence introducer (Hex 9B for 8-bit code or Hex 1B5B for 7-bit code).
c1
A compatibility byte that ensures the terminal emulation understands the command string sent to it.
The c1 is a revision level character for compatibility purposes, which will increment with each revision.
The original value for this parameter is 1.
;
A required delimiter that must precede all parameter entries.
p1
Not used.
p2
?(Alpha Only Match)
Alpha only match includes the following characters: A-Z, a-z, comma, period, dash, space.
p3
$(Digits Only Match)
Digits only match includes the following characters: 0-9.
p4
#(Numeric Only Match)
Numeric only match includes the following characters: 0-9, plus, comma, period, dash, space.
p5
+(Alphanumeric Only Match)
Alphanumeric only match includes the following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, plus, comma, period, dash,
space.
p6
*(Match All)
Match all includes any GL or GR characters.
+G
The final characters of the ANSI command sequence. This combination indicates the end of the
command string and identifies the command string as a local edit wildcard command.
Using Local Edit
Using the local edit command enables the programmer to control data entry at the client. The local edit field length can be
as long as the virtual screen.
The client edits the field locally as data is entered and not when the field is exited. During the editing of a field, if the data
fails the match test, the cursor does not move.
Exception
When a bar code entry fails the match test, the cursor goes to the first position where the character did not match the
test. The remaining characters in the input field are checked against the match test.
5 - 70
Programming Local Edit Fields
1. Position the cursor to the beginning of the local edit field.
2. Send the CSId+A command to put the TE in local edit setup mode.
3. Send the local edit match characters which could be either exact match or wildcards. These are sent as regular GL
or GR characters. They will be stored internally in the TE and not displayed on the screen. The cursor position will
automatically be updated after each char is received.
Note: Setting a screen cell as a local edit cell overrides any previous DAQ/SPA/SSA settings for that cell and vice
versa.
4. If desired, position the cursor to a new location and send more local edit match characters to define more fields.
Repeat as necessary.
5. Send a matching CSId+A command to put the TE in normal mode.
6. If automatic tabbing is desired to the start of each field, the host must send the standard area or tab commands at
the start of each local edit field. This can be accomplished even when the TE is in local edit mode.
7. The TE user may now enter data through keyboard or RS-232 inputs.
If the user input passes the local edit checks, the data will be displayed (if the local edit field was set up as CSI0+A).
The data will not be displayed if the local edit field was set up as CSI1+A. In either case, the cursor position will
advance by 1.
If the data does not pass the local edit checks, the TE will beep to inform the user and the cursor will not advance.
Requirements
The following requirements must be met for local edit to work properly:
• The client must be in block mode (LXELM).
• Local echo must be enabled in send-receive mode (SRM).
• The client must be an RFTerm client to have local edit capabilities.
5 - 71
VT Host Key Descriptions
Escape sequence values associated with various keys are noted for 7 bit ASCII mode and 8 bit ASCII mode.
Hold
Hld - This key has no current action.
Enter
Ent - The Enter or Return key transmits either a carriage return (CR) character or a carriage return and line feed (LF)
character, depending on the VT configuration.
See 8-Bit Code Table (page 5-4).
Compose Character
Cmp - The Compose Character key does not transmit a code. Pressing the Compose character key starts a compose
sequence which is used to generate characters that cannot be typed directly from the keyboard. This key is not implemented.
Tab
Tab - This key transmits a TAB character.
Delete
Del - This key transmits a DEL character.
Break
Brk - This key has no current action.
Cancel
Can - This key transmits a CAN character.
Answerback
Ans - This key sends an ENQ request to the host.
Find
Fnd - This key transmits the escape sequence:
ESC [1 ~ (7 bit ASCII mode)
or
CSI 1 ~ (8 bit ASCII mode)
Insert Here
Ins - This key transmits the escape sequence:
ESC [2 ~ (7 bit ASCII mode)
or
CSI 2 ~ (8 bit ASCII mode)
Remove
Rem - This key transmits the escape sequence:
ESC [3 ~ (7 bit ASCII mode)
or
CSI 3 ~ (8 bit ASCII mode)
Select
Sel - This key transmits the escape sequence:
ESC [4 ~ (7 bit ASCII mode)
5 - 72
or
CSI 4 ~ (8 bit ASCII mode)
Previous Screen
Prv - This key generates an escape sequence:
ESC [5 ~ (7 bit ASCII mode)
or
CSI 5 ~ (8 bit ASCII mode)
Next Screen
Nxt - This key transmits the escape sequence:
ESC [6 ~ (7 bit ASCII mode)
or
CSI 6 ~ (8 bit ASCII mode)
Escape
Esc - This key sends an ESC character to the host.
Backspace
BS - This key sends a BS character to the host.
Line Feed
LF - This key sends a LF character to the host
PF Keys
PF1 - PF4 - The numeric keypad keys PF1 through PF5 keys transmit the following escape sequences. The default
action of Function Keys 1 through 4 is identical.
PF Key
7 bit ANSI Mode
8 bit ANSI Mode
VT 52 Mode
PF1
SS3 P
ESC OP
ESC P
PF2
SS3 Q
ESC OQ
ESC Q
PF3
SS3 R
ESC OR
ESC R
PF4
SS3 S or
ESC OS
ESC S
The 5 keys F1-F5 on a VT client are local function keys and do not send codes. When a device has physical keys for
F1-F5, we send PF1-PF4 for the corresponding F1-F4 and send a custom escape sequence for F5, the custom escape
sequence depends on the device.
Function Keys
F1 - F40 - The Function keys F1 - F40 communicate with the host application. They transmit the following default
escape sequences or their 7-bit equivalent, unless reprogrammed by the user in the Function Key dialog.
Function Key
Default Value
F1
ESC OP
F2
ESC OQ
F3
ESC OR
F4
ESC OS
F5
none
F6
CSI 17~
F7
CSI 18~
F8
CSI 19~
5 - 73
Function Key
Default Value
F9
CSI 20~
F10
CSI 21~
F11 (ESC)
CSI 23~ (ESC in VT100 and VT 52)
F12 (BS)
CSI 24~ (BS in VT 100 and VT 52)
F13 (LF)
CSI 25~ (LF in VT 100 and VT 52)
F14
CSI 26~
F15 (HELP)
CSI 28~
F16 (DO)
CSI 29~
F17
CSI 31~
F18
CSI 32~
F19
CSI 33~
F20
CSI 34~
F21
CSI 25~
F22
CSI 26~
F23
CSI 28~
F24
CSI 29~
F25
CSI 31~
F26
CSI 32~
F27
CSI 33~
F28
CSI 34~
F29 through F40
none
Custom VT220 Host Commands
The following host command strings can be sent to RFTerm to provide the designated action.
Command String
Action
/cmd!1;3z/cmde
RFTerm disables the scanner
/cmd!1;0z/cmde
RFTerm enables the scanner
/cmd!1;2z/cmde
RFTerm turns on the display backlight
/cmd!1;1z/cmde
RFTerm turns off the display backlight
/cmd!1;4z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 1 second
/cmd!1;5z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 2 seconds
/cmd!1;6z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 3 seconds
/cmd!1;7z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 7 seconds
/cmd!2;00/cmde
Do not display (or remove) virtual keyboard
/cmd!2;10/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 1
(Left Numeric), orientation 0
/cmd!2;20/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 2
(Right Numeric), orientation 0
/cmd!2;30/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 3
(Qwerty or SIP), orientation 0
/cmd!2;40/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 4
(HX2 Emulator), orientation 0
5 - 74
Notes
Only supported on mobile devices containing a vibration
unit, such as MX7 Tecton, MX8 and MX9. Vibration has
no effect on other devices.
Virtual keyboard is only supported on the Dolphin 70e
Black. See Virtual Keyboards (page 9-12).
6
ANSI Quick Reference Guide
Functionality List
Notes
Reset mode terminating character is l, set mode is h.
C
The configuration utility equivalent of this command.
M
The modes that affect this command.
R
The effect generated when this mode is reset.
S
The effect generated when this mode is set.
BKC
Bar code/Keypad Setup Private Sequence
CCT
Character Collection Timer Private Sequence
DECOM
DEC Origin Mode
DECPEX
DEC Print Extent Mode
DECPFF
DEC Print Form Feed Mode
DRM/SM
DECRM/DECSM
EBM
Editing Boundary Mode
ERM
Erasure Mode
LNM
Line Feed/New Line Mode
LRM/SM
LXERM/LXESM
NRC
National Replacement Character Sets
SEM
Select Editing Extent Mode
SGR
Select Graphic Rendition
SRM
Send/Receive Mode
TSM
Tab Stop Mode
TSS
Transmit/Screen Setup Private Sequence
6-1
Cursor Positioning
6-2
Cursor
Pos.
Description
Hex Value / Esc Seq
BS
Backspace
0x08 (^H)
CUB
Cursor Back
ESC[PnD
M=None
CUF
Cursor Forward
ESC[PnC
M=None
CUD
Cursor Down
ESC[PnB
M=None
CUU
Cursor Up
ESC[PnA
M=None
CUP
Cursor Position
ESC[Pr;PcH
M=None
HVP
Horizontal Vertical Pos
ESC[Pr;Pcf
M=None
CHA
Cursor Horizontal Absolute
ESC[PnG
CR
Carriage Return
0x0d (^M)
LF
Line Feed
0x0a (^J)
Notes
M=Scroll Region, LNM
FF
Form Feed
0x0c (^L)
M=Scroll Region, LNM; Same as LF
VT
Vertical Tab
0x0b (^K)
M=Scroll Region, LNM; Same as LF
IND
Index
0x84 (ESC D)
M=Scroll Region
RI
Reverse Index
0x8d (ESC M)
M=Scroll Region
LNM
Line Feed/New Line Mode
ESC[20l (or h)
R=LF, S=LF+CR (RM/SM);
See Transmission To Host (page 6-4)
LXENE
New Line Echo Mode
ESC[=2l (or h)
R=neither, S=CR+LF (LRM/SM);Also TSS 6;
C=EchoCrLf
CNL
Cursor Next Line
ESC[PnE
NEL
Next Line
0x85 (ESC E)
CVT
Cursor Vertical Tab
ESC[PnY
CPL
Cursor Previous Line
ESC[PnF
M=Scroll Region
Forms
Forms
Description
Hex Value/
ESC Seq
Notes
HT
Horizontal Tab
0x09 (^I)
No tab to protected cells
CHT
Cursor Horizontal
Tab
ESC[PnI
No tab to protected cells
CBT
Cursor Back Tab
ESC[PnZ
No tab to protected cells
HTJ
Horizontal Tab w/
Justify
0x89 (ESC I)
No tab to protected cells
HTS
Horizontal Tab Set
0x88 (ESC H)
M=TSM
CTC
Cursor Tab Clear
ESC[PnW
(TSM reset/TSM set); 0,2=column/position,
4=all/row, 5=all/all
TBC
Tab Clear
ESC[Png
(TSM reset/TSM set); 0=column/position,
2=all/row, 3=all/all
TSM
Tab Set Mode
ESC[18l (or h)
R=virtual, S=curr line (RM/SM)
DAQ
Define Area
Qualification
ESC[Pno
0=all data, 1=prot, 2=display,3=num,
4=alpha, 5=right just, 6=zero filled, 7=tab, 8=selected,
9=space filled,10=hidden,
15=keyboard input only
SPA
Start Protected
Area
0x96 (ESC V)
Same as DAQ 1
EPA
End Protected
Area
0x97 (ESC W)
Current area is all input
SSA
Start Selected
Area
0x86 (ESC F)
ESA
End Selected Area
0x87 (ESC G)
Current area is all input
EA
Erase Area
ESC[PnO
0=to end, 1=from start, 2=all; M=ERM Does not erase area
type
EF
Erase Field
ESC[PnN
0=to end, 1= from start, 2=all; M=EBM; Does not erase
area type
LEM
Local Edit Match
ESC[Pn+A
R=display, S=hide
LEM Alpha
WC
Alpha only
wildcard
ESC[c1;;p2+G
Matches A-Z, a-z, comma, period, dash, space;
C=AlphaOnly
LEM Digits
WC
Digits only
wildcard
ESC[c1;;;p3+G
Matches 0-9; C=DigitsOnly
LEM
Numeric WC
Numeric only
wildcard
ESC[c1;;;;p4+G
Matches 0-9, plus, comma, period, dash, space;
C=NumericOnly
LEM
Alphanum
WC
Alphanumeric only
wildcard
ESC[c1;;;;;p5+G
Matches A-Z, a-z, 0-9, plus, comma, period, dash, space;
C = AlphaNumericOnly
LEM Match
All WC
Match all wildcard
ESC[c1;;;;;;p6+G
All GL and GR; C=MatchAll
6-3
Transmission To Host
Transmission
To Host
6-4
Description
Hex Value/
Esc Seq
Notes
GATM
Guarded Area Transmit
Mode
ESC[1l (or h)
R=unguarded, S=entire screen (RM/SM)
MATM
Multiple Area Transmit
Mode
ESC[15l (or h)
R=cursor selected, S=all selected (RM/SM)
SATM
Selected Area Transmit
Mode
ESC[17l (or h)
R=selected, S=virtual (RM/SM)
LXEAS
Auto Send Mode
ESC[=3l (or h)
R=disable, s=enable (LRM/SM); SRM must be
reset; Also TSS 3; C=AutoTransmit
SRM
Send Receive Mode
ESC[12l (or h)
R=local echo, S=char (RM/SM); Also TSS 10;
C=SendReceiveMode
LXELM
Line Mode
ESC[=1l (or h)
R=block, S=scroll (LRM/SM);Also TSS 5;
C=ScrollMode
DECSCL
Select Operating Level
ESC[62;Pn"p
R=8 bit, S=7 bit
S7C1T
Select 7 Bit Transmission
ESC F
A space (0x20) precedes F; C=EightBitMode
S8C1T
Select 8 Bit Transmission
ESC G
A space (0x20) precedes G; C=EightBitMode
LNM
Line Feed/New Line Mode
ESC[c1;;;;p4+F
R=CR, S=CR+LF;
Also TSS 4; See Cursor Positioning (page 6-2);
C=TransmitCR/LF
OLM
Online Mode
ESC[c1;;;;;;;;p8+F
R=online, S=offline; Also TSS 8;
C=OnlineMode
Editing
Editing
Description
Hex Value/
Esc Seq
Notes
ECH
Erase Character
ESC[PnX
M=ERM
DCH
Delete Character
ESC[PnP
M=SEM
Aborts at protected cells
ICH
Insert Character
ESC[Pn@
M=SEM
Aborts at protected cells
SEM
Select Editing
Extent Mode
ESC[PnQ
0=display, 1=row, 2=field, 3=area; M=None
DL
Delete Line
ESC[PnM
M=None
IL
Insert Line
ESC[PnL
M=None
ED
Erase Display
ESC[PnJ
0=to end, 1=from start, 2=all; M=ERM
Erases area type/boundaries, homes cursor.
EL
Erase Line
ESC[PnK
0=to end, 1=from start, 2=all; M=ERM
Erases area type/boundaries
DECSED
DEC Selective Erase
In Display
ESC[?PnJ
0=to end, 1=from start, 2=all; M=None
Never erases protected cells or area types/boundaries, homes
cursor
DECSEL
DEC Selective
Erase In Line
ESC[?PnK
0=to end, 1=from start, 2=all; M=None
Never erases protected cells or area types/boundaries
ERM
Erasure Mode
ESC[6l (or
h)
R=cannot erase prot,
S=erase prot (RM/SM)
SD
Scroll Down
ESC[PnT
M=Scroll Region
SU
Scroll Up
ESC[PnS
M=Scroll Region
DECSTBM
DEC Set Top/
Bottom Margins
ESC[Pt;Pbr
M=DECOM; Must have full screen client to use; Min height of
region is 2 rows, Homes cursor according to DECOM
IRM
Insert/Replace Mode
ESC[4l (or
h)
R=overwrite,
S=insert (RM/SM)
Character Rendition
Character
Rendition
Description
Hex
Value/
Esc Seq
SGR
Select Graphics Rendition
ESC[Pnm
Notes
0=normal
1,22=bold
4,24=underline
5,25=blink
7,27=reverse
First number enables, second
disables
6-5
Bar Code
Bar code
Description
Hex Value/
Esc Seq
Left Justify
Left Justify
ESC[c1;;p2+E
R=off
S=on (BKC); Requires block mode
C=LeftJustify
Clear
Clear
ESC[c1;;;p3+E
R=off
S=on (BKC); Requires block mode
C=ClearData
Truncate
Truncate
ESC[c1;;;;p4+E
R=off
S=on (BKC); Requires block mode
C=TruncateData
Auto Advance
Auto Advance
ESC[c1;;;;;p5+E
R=off
S=on (BKC); Requires block mode
C=AutoAdvance
Notes
Reports / Status / Test
Reports /Status/ Test
Description
Hex Value/
Esc Seq
ENQ
Enquire
0x05 (^E)
CPR
Cursor Position Report
ESC[Pr;PcR
Only sent from client; Position relative to virtual
display
DSR
Device Status Report
ESC[Pnn
5=status
6=CPR
26=keyboard
Notes
Printing
6-6
Printing
Description
Hex Value/
Esc Seq
MC
Media Copy
ESC[Pni
4=off
5=on
DC2
Device Control 2
0x12 (^R)
Ignored from host
DC4
Device Control 4
0x14 (^T)
Same as MC4
APM
Auto Print Mode
ESC[?Pni
4=off
5=on
PL
Print Line
ECS[?1i
Notes
PS
Print Screen
ESC[0i
DECPFF
DEC Print Form Feed Mode
ECS[?18l (or h)
h=enable terminating character
l=disable terminating character
DECPEX
DEC Print Extent Mode
ECS[?18l (or h)
h=full screen
l=scrolling region
Hat Encoding
Desired
ASCII
Hex Value
Hat
Encoded
Desired
ASCII
Hex Value
Hat
Encoded
NUL
00
^@
×
D7
~W
SOH
01
^A
Ø
D8
~X
STX
02
^B
Ù
D9
~Y
ETX
03
^C
Ú
DA
~Z
EOT
04
^D
Û
DB
~[
ENQ
05
^E
Ü
DC
~\\
ACK
06
^F
Ý
DD
~]
BEL
07
^G
Þ
DE
~\^
BS
08
^H
ß
DF
~_ (Underscore)
HT
09
^I
à
E0
~`
LF
0A
^J
á
E1
~a
VT
0B
^K
â
E2
~b
FF
0C
^L
ã
E3
~c
CR
0D
^M
ä
E4
~d
SO
0E
^N
å
E5
~e
SI
0F
^O
æ
E6
~f
DLE
10
^P
ç
E7
~g
DC1 (XON)
11
^Q
è
E8
~h
DC2
12
^R
é
E9
~i
DC3 (XOFF)
13
^S
ê
EA
~j
DC4
14
^T
ë
EB
~k
NAK
15
^U
ì
EC
~l
SYN
16
^V
í
ED
~m
ETB
17
^W
î
EE
~n
CAN
18
^X
ï
EF
~o
EM
19
^Y
ð
F0
~p
SUB
1A
^Z
ñ
F1
~q
ESC
1B
^[
ò
F2
~r
FS
1C
^\\
ó
F3
~s
GS
1D
^]
ô
F4
~t
6-7
Desired
ASCII
Hex Value
Hat
Encoded
Desired
ASCII
Hex Value
Hat
Encoded
RS
1E
^^
õ
F5
~u
US
1F
^_ (Underscore)
ö
F6
~v
80
~^@
÷
F7
~w
81
~^A
ø
F8
~x
82
~^B
ù
F9
~y
83
~^C
ú
FA
~z
IND
84
~^D
û
FB
~{
NEL
85
~^E
ü
FC
~|
SSA
86
~^F
ý
FD
~}
®
AE
~. (Period)
þ
FE
~~
¯
AF
~/
ÿ
FF
~^?
°
B0
~0 (Zero)
ESA
87
~^G
±
B1
~1
HTS
88
~^H
²
B2
~2
HTJ
89
~^I
³
B3
~3
VTS
8A
~^J
´
B4
~4
PLD
8B
~^K
µ
B5
~5
PLU
8C
~^L
¶
B6
~6
RI
8D
~^M
·
B7
~7
SS2
8E
~^N
¸
B8
~8
SS3
8F
~^O
¹
B9
~9
DCS
90
~^P
º
BA
~:
PU1
91
~^Q
»
BB
~;
PU2
92
~^R
¼
BC
~<
STS
93
~^S
½
D
~=
CCH
94
~^T
¾
BE
~>
MW
95
~^U
¿
BF
~?
SPA
96
~^V
À
C0
~@
EPA
97
~^W
Á
C1
~A
98
~^X
Â
C2
~B
99
~^Y
Ã
C3
~C
9A
~^Z
6-8
Desired
ASCII
Hex Value
Hat
Encoded
Desired
ASCII
Hex Value
Hat
Encoded
Ä
C4
~D
CSI
9B
~^[
Å
C5
~E
ST
9C
~^\\
Æ
C6
~F
OSC
9D
~^]
Ç
C7
~G
PM
9E
~^^
È
C8
~H
APC
9F
~^_
(Underscore)
É
C9
~I
(no-break
space)
A0
~ (Tilde and
Space)
Ê
CA
~J
¡
A1
~!
Ë
CB
~K
¢
A2
~”
Ì
CC
~L
£
A3
~#
Í
CD
~M
¤
A4
~$
Î
CE
~N
¥
A5
~%
Ï
CF
~O
¦
A6
~&
Ð
D0
~P
§
A7
~’
Ñ
D1
~Q
¨
A8
~(
Ò
D2
~R
©
A9
~)
Ó
D3
~S
ª
AA
~*
Ô
D4
~T
«
AB
~+
Õ
D5
~U
¬
AC
~,
Ö
D6
~V
(soft hyphen)
AD
~- (Dash)
6-9
DEC Special Graphics - Code Table
Refer to the 8-bit code table below that lists all the decimal, hexadecimal, and octal values for each character:
6 - 10
IS0 8859-1 Character Set
6 - 11
6 - 12
7
IBM 3270
3270 Host Key Descriptions
Attention
Attn - The Attention key interrupts the host application.
System Request
Srq - The System Request key gives context to the System Software such as the SSCP (System Services Control Point).
Clear
Clr - The Clear key causes a CLEAR Attention Identifier key to be sent to the host and the host responds according to the
host application.
Reset
Rst - The Reset key resets the mobile client. Depending upon the current state, it removes the host application from a keyboard inhibit state, terminates the System Request functions and exits the mobile client from insert mode.
Erase Input
EIn - This key clears all unprotected input fields and moves the cursor to the beginning of the first input field.
Erase to End of Field
Eof - This key erases all data in an input field from the current cursor location to the end of the input field.
Delete
Del - The Delete key deletes data from an input field. When you press this key, the character at the cursor location is
deleted, and all characters to the right of the cursor shift one position to the left.
Insert
Ins - This key les the insert mode on and off. In insert mode, characters are inserted at the current cursor location if space
is available. The characters to the right of the cursor are shifted one character position to the right.
Home
Hm - This key repositions the cursor to the first input location of the first input field.
Tab or Next
Tb - This key moves the cursor forward to the next input field. When the cursor is not on an input field it moves to the next
input field from the current cursor location.
Backtab or Previous
BTb - This key moves the cursor back to the previous input field. When the cursor is not on an input field, the cursor moves
to the previous input field from the current cursor location. This key is equivalent to [Shift][Tab].
Enter
Ent - The Enter key submits control to the host application.
New Line
NL - This function moves the cursor to the first input field on the next line.
7-1
Escape
Esc - The function is the same as the Reset command.
PA Keys
Pa1, Pa2, Pa3 - The PA1 through PA3 keys communicate with the host application. Their use is defined by the host application.
Function Keys
F1 - F24 - The Function keys F1 - F24 communicate with the host application. Their use is defined by the host application,
unless their action has been programmed using the Function Key dialog.
3270 Commands
Printing a Field
You can print a field by sending a print command (*P) from the host to the client. It must be preceded by a field attribute
(FA) byte. The printing ends when the next FA is encountered. The value of the FA is ignored, but it must be present.
Beep
You can sound a beep by sending the beep command (*B) from the host to the client. It must be preceded by a field attribute (FA) byte. When RFTerm encounters a beep command, by default it activates the Good sound.
Host initiated sounds can also be reassigned to produce the Bad or Alarm sounds by using the Sound Key field. For example entering $HA in the Sound Key field means to assign Host initiated sounds to the Alarm sound
Refer to Sounds (page 2-14) to review Good, Bad and Alarm sounds and for more instructions on using the Sound Key
field.
Custom IBM 3270 Host Commands
The following host command strings can be sent to RFTerm to provide the designated action.
Command String
Action
/cmd!1;3z/cmde
RFTerm disables the scanner
/cmd!1;0z/cmde
RFTerm enables the scanner
/cmd!1;2z/cmde
RFTerm turns on the display backlight
/cmd!1;1z/cmde
RFTerm turns off the display backlight
/cmd!1;4z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 1 second
/cmd!1;5z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 2 seconds
/cmd!1;6z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 3 seconds
/cmd!1;7z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 7 seconds
/cmd!2;00/cmde
Do not display (or remove) virtual keyboard
/cmd!2;10/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 1
(Left Numeric), orientation 0
/cmd!2;20/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 2
(Right Numeric), orientation 0
/cmd!2;30/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 3
(Qwerty or SIP), orientation 0
/cmd!2;40/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 4
(HX2 Emulator), orientation 0
7-2
Notes
Only supported on mobile devices containing a vibration
unit, such as MX7 Tecton, MX8 and MX9. Vibration has
no effect on other devices.
Virtual keyboard is only supported on the Dolphin 70e
Black. See Virtual Keyboards (page 9-12).
8
IBM 5250
5250 Host Key Descriptions
Attention
Attn - The Attention key interrupts the host application.
System Request
Srq - The System Request key gives context to the System Software such as the SSCP (System Services Control Point).
Clear
Clr - The Clear key causes a CLEAR Attention Identifier key to be sent to the host and the host responds according to the
host application.
Reset
Rst - The Reset key resets the client. Depending upon the current state, it removes the host application from a keyboard
inhibit state, terminates the System Request functions and exits the client from insert mode.
Erase Input
EIn - This key clears all unprotected input fields and moves the cursor to the beginning of the first input field.
Erase to End of Field
Eof - This key erases all data in an input field from the current cursor location to the end of the input field.
Field Minus
F- - This key causes the cursor to advance to the next field and a minus sign is inserted in the last position of a signed
numeric-only field.
Field Plus
F+ - This key causes the cursor to exit an input field and insert null characters from the current cursor location to the end of
the field.
Field Exit
FEx - This key behaves similar to the Field Plus key. It causes the cursor to exit an input field and insert null characters
from the current cursor location to the end of the field.
Duplicate
Dup - This DUP key is used to insert DUP characters in a field for host processing.
Field Mark
Mrk - The Field Mark key is used to insert a Field Mark character in a field for host processing.
Delete
Del - The Delete key deletes data from an input field. When you press this key, the character at the cursor location is
deleted, and all characters to the right of the cursor shift one position to the left.
Insert
Ins - This key les the insert mode on and off. In insert mode, characters are inserted at the current cursor location if space
is available. The characters to the right of the cursor are shifted one character position to the right.
8-1
Home
Hm - This key moves the cursor to the first input location of the first input field.
Tab or Next
Tb - This key moves the cursor forward to the next input field. When the cursor is not on an input field it moves to the next
input field from the current cursor location.
Backtab or Previous
BTb - This key moves the cursor back to the previous input field. When the cursor is not on an input field, the cursor moves
to the previous input field from the current cursor location. This key is equivalent to [Shift][Tab].
Enter
Ent - The Enter key submits control to the host application.
New Line
NL - This function moves the cursor to the first input field on the next line.
Roll Up
RUp - This function sends a roll up request to the host, similar to a scroll up.
Roll Down
RDn - This function sends a roll down request to the host, similar to a scroll down.
Cursor Select
Sel - This function allows the user to select an input field using the keyboard.
Print
Prt - This function prints the current screen.
Function Keys
F1 - F24 -The Function keys F1 - F24 communicate with the host application. Their use is defined by the host application,
unless their action has been programmed using the Function Key dialog.
5250 Commands
Input Device ID (*K)
The input device ID feature provides the host application developer with the ability to determine which Honeywell mobile client user input device and which bar code symbology was utilized to enter data in any field on the screen. When the 5250
host application is programmed to request this data from the mobile client, and when the input device ID feature is enabled
at the client, the client sends this information to the 5250 host emulation. This feature can be used with the match field edit
and scan and increment features, in addition to normal user input.
This feature is useful to monitor the use of automatic input devices to enforce the practice of not using the keyboard or keypad as an input device.
Description
There are two major components to this feature:
• The input ID field identifies the field that follows as an operator input field.
• The operator input field is the area on the screen where information is returned to the host application.
Input ID Field
The input ID field:
8-2
•
•
•
•
•
•
must be preceded by a field attribute (FA) that designates the input ID field as unprotected (operator input capable).
is designated with an * (asterisk) as the first character and a K as the second character.
can have any display attribute including non-display.
does not have to be on the same line as the operator input field, but it must be the first input field to precede it.
cannot have any input fields defined on the screen map between it and its associated operator input field.
must have the Modified Data Tag (MDT) set by the host application so it will return to the host when [Enter] is
pressed.
• behaves exactly the same as any protected field on the Honeywell client device.
Terminal Operation
When the input ID feature is enabled in client setup, the RFTerm 5250 terminal emulation modifies the input ID field to
behave as if it has the Bypass (protected) field attribute. The user can place the cursor in the input ID field with the
arrow keys, but input is not allowed. If the user attempts input in this field, an error message will appear indicating that
the field is protected. If the input ID feature is not enabled at the client device, RFTerm will treat input ID fields as normal input fields.
Examples
Example 1
The example illustrates the input ID feature used with a normal input field. In all cases, the field attribute (FA) preceding the input ID field (*K) designates an unprotected (input capable) field:
After keyboard entry (123456789), the contents of the input ID field and the operator input field become:
The input ID field is now 00, which indicates that the user utilized the keyboard or keypad to enter data. In the
event the user utilized a bar code scanner, the input ID field would contain a two-digit code identifying the bar code
symbology. (Refer to the list of input device types and their corresponding input ID codes at the end of this segment.)
Input device ID reports the last device utilized by the end-user to fill in the input field to the host. If the user were
to partially fill in an input field using a bar code scanner, and then finish filling in the input field with entry from the
keyboard, the host application would report that entry for the field came from the keyboard or keypad. The user
cannot modify the contents of the input ID field.
8-3
Example 2
Example 2 illustrates that protected fields can be present between the input ID field and the operator input field.
The field attribute (FA) preceding ITEM: designates the prompt field as a protected field; the FA preceding the
operator input field designates the last field as unprotected:
Input Identification Types
Here is a list of the numerical values that appear in the input ID field returned from the mobile client, designating the
type of input device utilized by the end-user.
Numerical Value
Input Device Type
00
Keyboard / Keypad
01
Bar code Code 39
02
Bar code Code 128
03
Bar code Interleaved 2 of 5
04
Bar code UPC
05
Bar code EAN
06
Bar code Code 11
07
Bar code Discrete 2 of 5
08
Bar code MSI Plessey
50
RS-232
Printing a Field
You can print a field by sending a print command (*P) from the host to the client. It must be preceded by a field attribute
(FA) byte. The printing ends when the next FA is encountered. The value of the FA is ignored, but it must be present.
Beep
You can sound a beep by sending the beep command (*B) from the host to the client. It must be preceded by a field attribute (FA) byte. When RFTerm encounters a beep command, by default it activates the Good sound.
Host initiated sounds can also be reassigned to produce the Bad or Alarm sounds by using the Sound Key field. For example entering $HA in the Sound Key field means to assign Host initiated sounds to the Alarm sound
Refer to Sounds (page 2-14) to review Good, Bad and Alarm sounds and for more instructions on using the Sound Key
field.
Terminal Setup
You can configure printing options by sending the Terminal Setup command (*E) from the host to the client. These options
apply when either the “Prnt” ToolBar button (IBM 3 or IBM 4 KeyBar) or the “Prt” button on the CE SmartPad is pressed.
The Terminal Setup command has the following format, each parameter must be preceded by a semicolon (;) :
*Ecl;p1;p2;p3;p4;p5;p6;p7;p8;p9;p10;p11;p12
This command must be sent to the client in the screen definition of the first field on the screen.
8-4
c1
A revision compatibility byte, currently not supported, use 1.
p1
Save to disk, currently not supported, use 0.
p2
Bar code left justify, currently not supported, use a semicolon as a place holder.
p3
Bar code input clear mode, currently not supported, use a semicolon as a place holder.
p4
Bar code input truncate mode, currently not supported, use a semicolon as a place holder.
p5
Bar code input truncate mode, currently not supported, use a semicolon as a place holder.
p6
Auto transmit after print.
0 = Do not transmit an Enter command after a print (default)
1 = Automatically transmit an Enter command after a print
p7
Print carriage return per line.
0 = No carriage return per line on a screen print
1 = Append a carriage return per line on a screen print (default)
p8
Print line feed per line.
0 = No line feed per line on a screen print
1 = Append a line feed per line on a screen print (default)
p9
Status line display mode, currently not supported, use a semicolon as a place holder.
p10
Input device ID, currently not supported, use a semicolon as a place holder.
p11
Swap Tab/Field Exit, currently not supported, use a semicolon as a place holder.
p12
Tab/Field Exit for advancing, currently not supported, use a semicolon as a place holder.
Input Identification Types
Here is a list of the numerical values that appear in the input ID field returned from the mobile client, designating the
type of input device utilized by the end-user.
Numerical Value
Input Device Type
00
Keyboard / Keypad
01
Bar code Code 39
02
Bar code Code 128
03
Bar code Interleaved 2 of 5
04
Bar code UPC
05
Bar code EAN
06
Bar code Code 11
07
Bar code Discrete 2 of 5
08
Bar code MSI Plessey
50
RS-232
Custom Mapping
The method for creating EBCDIC character sets for countries other than the U.S. is described below, and is followed by an
example.
Custom Character Mapping
Upon loading, RFTerm first loads the standard character set , see IS0 8859-1 Character Set (page 6-11) (Latin 1). RFTerm
then searches for a plain text document file named EBCDIC.TXT in the \os dependent\LXE\RFTerm folder, which is the
default install folder for the application. If the file is found, RFTerm will read replacement character pairs from the EBCDIC.TXT file and place them in the substitution table for IBM emulations.
For example
0x40 0x52
will replace the default character whose value is 0x40 with the character whose value is 0x52 according to ISO Character
Set 8859-1 (Latin 1). Each occurrence of the character 0x40 will be replaced regardless of whether it originated from the
host or from the client.
8-5
Where the <white space> represents any number of spaces and/or tabs, and is used for clarity. The first entry is the EBCDIC character position in hexadecimal in the default EBCDIC character table, and the second entry is the hexadecimal or
decimal position in the ISO Character Set 8859-1 (Latin 1) table.
Custom Keyboard Mapping
RFTerm will also search for a KEYS.TXT file in the same folder. It will contain character pairs of the same format as the
EBCDIC.TXT file, however these substitutions will be made ONLY for characters originating from the keyboard.
Note: If both files are present, a key press will be modified by the KEYS.TXT substitution and then modified by the
EBCDIC.TXT substitution. Place a copy of the EBCDIC.TXT and KEYS.TXT files in the device operating system
persistent folder. This will ensure the files are saved instead of discarded if the device is rebooted.
Custom IBM 5250 Host Commands
The following host command strings can be sent to RFTerm to provide the designated action.
Command String
Action
/cmd!1;3z/cmde
RFTerm disables the scanner
/cmd!1;0z/cmde
RFTerm enables the scanner
/cmd!1;2z/cmde
RFTerm turns on the display backlight
/cmd!1;1z/cmde
RFTerm turns off the display backlight
/cmd!1;4z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 1 second
/cmd!1;5z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 2 seconds
/cmd!1;6z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 3 seconds
/cmd!1;7z/cmde
RFTerm turns on vibration for 7 seconds
/cmd!2;00/cmde
Do not display (or remove) virtual keyboard
/cmd!2;10/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 1
(Left Numeric), orientation 0
/cmd!2;20/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 2
(Right Numeric), orientation 0
/cmd!2;30/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 3
(Qwerty or SIP), orientation 0
/cmd!2;40/cmde
Display virtual keyboard configuration 4
(HX2 Emulator), orientation 0
8-6
Notes
Only supported on mobile devices containing a vibration
unit, such as MX7 Tecton, MX8 and MX9. Vibration has
no effect on other devices.
Virtual keyboard is only supported on the Dolphin 70e
Black. See Virtual Keyboards (page 9-12).
9
Key Maps
RFTerm ToolBar
The bitmaps and associated action text for all the actions and operations that can be associated with the configurable keys are
in the table below.
Icon
Function
Icon
Function
Previous KeyBar
VT Do
Next KeyBar
VT Escape
(Blank) no action
VT Find
Enter key
VT Help
Tab key
VT Hold
Field Backspace (Backtab)
VT Insert Here
Left arrow key
VT Linefeed
Right arrow key
VT Next
Up arrow key
VT PF1
Down arrow key
VT PF2
Jump to Session 1 (S1)
VT PF3
Jump to Session 2 (S2)
VT PF4
Jump to Session 3 (S3)
VT Previous
Jump to Session 4 (S4)
VT Remove
Jump to Next Connected Session
VT Select
Connect Session
VT Numpad 0
Font Increase
VT Numpad 1
Font Decrease
VT Numpad 2
Configure Session
VT Numpad 3
Print Screen
VT Numpad 4
Start Menu Toggle
VT Numpad 5
SmartPad Toggle
VT Numpad 6
9-1
Icon
9-2
Function
Icon
Function
Text InputTool Toggle
VT Numpad 7
Program Exit (Emulator)
VT Numpad 8
F1 function key
VT Numpad 9
F2 function key
VT Numpad Comma
F3 function key
VT Numpad Enter
F4 function key
VT Numpad Minus
F5 function key
VT Numpad Period
F6 function key
ASCII 0
F7 function key
ASCII 1
F8 function key
ASCII 2
F9 function key
ASCII 3
F10 function key
ASCII 4
F11 function key
ASCII 5
F12 function key
ASCII 6
F13 function key
ASCII 7
F14 function key
ASCII 8
F15 function key
ASCII 9
F16 function key
ASCII +
F17 function key
ASCII -
F18 function key
VT UDK 6
F19 function key
VT UDK 7
F20 function key
VT UDK 8
F21 function key
VT UDK 9
F22 function key
VT UDK 10
F23 function key
VT UDK 11
F24 function key
VT UDK 12
Icon
Function
Icon
Function
F25 function key (VT only)
VT UDK 13
F26 function key (VT only)
VT UDK 14
F27 function key (VT only)
VT UDK 15
F28 function key (VT only)
VT UDK 16
F29 function key (VT only)
VT UDK 17
F30 function key (VT only)
VT UDK 18
F31 function key (VT only)
VT UDK 19
F32 function key (VT only)
VT UDK 20
F33 function key (VT only)
Input 1 (Text InputTool)
F34 function key (VT only)
Input 2 (Text InputTool)
F35 function key (VT only)
Input 3 (Text InputTool)
F36 function key (VT only)
Input 4 (Text InputTool)
F37 function key (VT only)
Input 5 (Text InputTool)
F38 function key (VT only)
Input 6 (Text InputTool)
F39 function key (VT only)
Input 7 (Text InputTool)
F40 function key (VT only)
Input 8 (Text InputTool)
IBM Attention
Input 9 (Text InputTool)
IBM Backspace
Input 10 (Text InputTool)
IBM Clear
Input 11 (Text InputTool)
IBM Delete
Input 12 (Text InputTool)
IBM Duplicate
Input 13 (Text InputTool)
IBM Erase EOF
Input 14 (Text InputTool)
IBM Erase Input
Input 15 (Text InputTool)
IBM Escape key
Input 16 (Text InputTool)
IBM Field +
Input 17 (Text InputTool)
IBM Field -
Input 18 (Text InputTool)
9-3
Icon
9-4
Function
Icon
Function
IBM Field Exit
Input 19 (Text InputTool)
IBM Field Mark
Input 20 (Text InputTool)
IBM Help (5250 only)
Horizontal Scroll Toggle
IBM Home
Vertical Scroll Toggle
IBM Insert Toggle
Horizontal Scroll Left (Page)
IBM New Line
Horizontal Scroll Right (Page)
IBM OIA Toggle
Vertical Scroll Up (Page)
IBM Print (5250 only)
Vertical Scroll Down (Page)
IBM PA1 key (3270 only)
Horizontal Scroll Left (End)
IBM PA2 key (3270 only)
Horizontal Scroll Right (End)
IBM PA3 key (3270 only)
Vertical Scroll Up (End)
IBM Reset
Vertical Scroll Down (End)
IBM Roll Up (5250 only)
Scroll Upper Left quadrant
IBM Roll Down (5250 only)
Scroll Upper Right quadrant
IBM System Request
Scroll Lower Left quadrant
VT Answerback
Scroll Lower Right quadrant
VT Backspace
Scroll Center quadrant
VT Cancel
Scroll Cursor Center
VT Delete
Scroll Cursor Visible
RFTerm Functions
Function
Path
Connect to Host
Disconnect from Host
Hide / Display MenuBar
Enable / Disable MenuBar (XP)
Hide / Display ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Hide / Display All Bars
(Not supported on Windows Mobile)
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(Not supported on Windows Mobile, Windows XP, Windows 7,
Windows 10, or Windows Embedded Standard)
Configure Host Session
Increase Font Size
Decrease Font Size
Font Selection
Display / Hide SmartPad
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or
Windows Embedded Standard)
Display / Hide InputTool
(Not supported on Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10, or
Windows Embedded Standard)
Scroll Up
Scroll Down
Scroll Left
Scroll Right
Print Setup
Exit RFTerm
Session > Connect or ToolBar Button
Session > Disconnect or ToolBar Button
File > Settings > Display > Hide Main Menu
File > Settings > Display > Disable MenuBar
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
File > Settings > Display > Menu at Bottom
Session > Configure
ToolBar Button: Capital A with Up Arrow
ToolBar Button: Capital A with Down Arrow
Session > Configure > Font > Font Weight combo box
Display > SmartPad
Display > InputTool
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
File > Print Setup
File > Exit
Functions Not Supported
Some functions are not supported with certain operating systems.
Function
Not Supported with these operating systems
Display / Hide SmartPad
Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10,,Windows Embedded Standard
Display / Hide InputTool
Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10,,Windows Embedded Standard
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10,,Windows Embedded Standard,
Windows Mobile
Hide / Display All Bars
Windows Mobile
9-5
Virtual Key Maps
The Virtual Key tables indicate the key combinations that RFTerm looks for to perform each function. These key combinations
are provided for the convenience of users who wish to remap RFTerm functions to physical keys different from those provided by
the default key map. In most cases, the key combinations used by RFTerm are the same for each device type. Exceptions are
noted.
RFTerm Functions - Virtual Keys
Important note for HX2 users:
When running an HX2 with an Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad, RFTerm hijacks virtual function keys F11 through F19 to perform
the RFTerm functions indicated in the “HX2” column of this table. This hijacking occurs only if the HX2 Function Key
Enable (page 3-35) option is not selected. If HX2 Function Key Enable is selected, the key map reverts to the standard
RFTerm virtual key map (indicated in the column labeled “Virtual Key” in the table below).
RFTerm Function
Virtual Key
HX2
Connect to Host
Ctrl Shift C
F17
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctrl Shift D
F17
Session > Disconnect
Escape
File > Exit
Exit the Emulator
Alt X
Ctrl Shift X
Help
Ctrl H
Ctrl H
N/A
Hide / Display All Bars
(See Note 1 below)
Ctrl Shift L
F16
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Ctrl Shift M
F15
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctrl Shift T
F14
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctrl Shift K
F13
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(See Note 2 below)
Ctrl Shift B
Ctrl Shift B
File > Settings > Display > Menu at Bottom
Configure Host Session
Ctrl Shift N
F18
Session > Configure
Next Session
Ctrl Shift J
Application Settings
Ctrl Shift E
F19
File > Settings
Session > S1/S2/S3/S4
Increase Font Size
Ctrl Shift Up
Arrow
F12
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl Shift Down
Arrow
F11
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl Shift 1
Ctrl Shift 1
Session > Configure > Font tab
Toggle Status
(See Note 3 below)
Ctrl Shift 2
Ctrl Shift 2
File > Settings > Status > Orientation
Toggle OIA Bar
Ctrl Shift O
Ctrl Shift O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA Bar
Display / Hide SmartPad
(see Note 1 below)
9-6
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide InputTool
(see Note 1 below)
Ctrl Shift I
Ctrl Shift I
Display > InputTool
Toggle Vertical Scroll Bars
Ctrl Shift V
Ctrl Shift V
File > Settings > Display > Hide Vertical
Toggle Horizontal Scroll Bars
Ctrl Shift H
Ctrl Shift H
File > Settings > Display > Hide Horiz
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
Ctrl Alt P
File > Print Screen
Scroll Up One Row
Shift Up Arrow
Shift Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Shift Down Arrow
Shift Down
Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Column
Shift Left Arrow
Shift Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
RFTerm Function
Virtual Key
HX2
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Scroll Right One Column
Shift Right Arrow
Shift Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Note 1
These RFTerm functions are not available with the following operating systems:
• Windows Embedded Standard, Microsoft Windows Embedded 7
• Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10,
Note 2
These RFTerm functions are not available with the following operating systems:
• Windows Mobile
• Windows Embedded Standard, Microsoft Windows Embedded 7
• Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 10,
Note 3
These RFTerm functions are not available with the following operating systems:
• Windows Mobile
9-7
ANSI Functions - Virtual Keys
Refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the ANSI key functions.
!
If using an HX2 with the Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad, review the Important Note for Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad (page
9-54). It contains important information on the function of keys F11 through F19 on this HX2 keypad.
ANSI Function
Virtual Key
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BS
Delete
Ctrl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Exit Program
9-8
Alt X
Ctrl Shift X
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Help
Ctrl H
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Local Echo On / Off
Not Supported
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
F11 - F20
KeyBar
F21 - F30
F21 - F30
KeyBar
F21 - F40
F31 - F40
KeyBar
Session > Configure > Connection > VT Config > Screen > Local Echo
IBM 3270 Functions - Virtual Keys
When running the RFTerm IBM 3270 terminal emulator on the HX2 refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1) for
explanations of the IBM 3270 functions.
!
If using an HX2 with the Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad, review the Important Note for Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad (page
9-54). It contains important information on the function of keys F11 through F19 on this HX2 keypad.
3270 Function
Virtual Key
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attention
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Shift Tab
Display > SmartPad > Btb
Clear
Ctrl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Cursor Block / Underline
Not Supported
File > Settings > Cursor > Cursor Options
Delete
Ctrl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
Bksp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Erase Input
Ctrl Bksp
Display > SmartPad > Ein
Error Reset
Ctrl R
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alt X
Ctrl Shift X
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Help
Ctrl H
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Home Key
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > NL
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
Roll Up
Not Supported
IBM 3 KeyBar: Roll Up
Roll Down
Not Supported
IBM 3 KeyBar: Roll Dn
SW Rev
Not Supported
File > About
Send
Not Supported
Base KeyBar: Ent
Status Line Toggle
Alt T
Ctrl Shift O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
System Request
Ctrl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl 1 - 3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
F11 - F20
KeyBar
F21 - F24
F21 - F24
KeyBar
9-9
IBM 5250 Functions - Virtual Keys
Refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1) for explanations of the IBM 5250 functions.
!
If using an HX2 with the Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad, review the Important Note for Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad (page
9-54). It contains important information on the function of keys F11 through F19 on this HX2 keypad.
5250 Function
Virtual key
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attention
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Shift Tab
Base KeyBar: Btb
Char Backspace
Bksp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctrl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Cursor Block / Underline
Not Supported
File > Settings > Cursor > Cursor Options
Delete
Ctrl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctrl U
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctrl Bksp
Display > SmartPad > Ein
Error Reset or Reset
Esc
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alt X
Ctrl Shift X
File > Exit
Field Exit
Ctrl Enter
Display > SmartPad > Fex
Field Minus
Ctrl M
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctrl L
Display > SmartPad > F+
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Home Key
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Help
Ctrl H
Insert
Ctrl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > NL
Next or Field Advance or Tab
Tab
Base KeyBar: Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
Display > SmartPad > Prt
Enter
Base KeyBar: Ent
Send or Enter CATV
Status Line Toggle
Alt T
Ctrl Shift 0
Special KeyBar: OIA
SW Rev
Not Supported
File > About
System Request
Ctrl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
F11 - F20
KeyBar
F21 - F24
F21 - F24
KeyBar
9 - 10
Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps
There are optional key maps for the F1 through F40 keys. To access the option, select Session > Configure > Keybd. If the
Two-key Function Keys checkbox is unchecked, the standard function key keypresses listed for each piece of equipment apply.
If this checkbox is checked, the following key maps replace the standard key maps for F1 through F40:
F1 and...
Produces
Ctrl or
F2 and...
Produces
F3 and...
Produces
F4 and...
Produces
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
!
If using an HX2 with the Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad, review the Important Note for Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad (page 954). It contains important information on the function of keys F11 through F19 on this HX2 keypad.
9 - 11
Dolphin 70e Black Keymaps
The Dolphin 70e Black does not have a traditional keypad. A virtual keyboard is used instead.
Virtual Keyboards
Multiple virtual keypads can be displayed on the device by commands issued from the host. For example, the host can display a full QWERTY keypad if the user must input information such as a user name and password or just a numeric keypad
if the user must input a quantity. The following commands can be sent out as either ASCII or EBCIDIC strings:
/cmd!2;0z/cmde
/cmd!2;1z/cmde
/cmd!2;2z/cmde
/cmd!2;3z/cmde
/cmd!2;4z/cmde
=
=
=
=
=
Do not display (or remove) virtual keyboard
Display virtual keyboard Configuration 1
Display virtual keyboard Configuration 2
Display virtual keyboard Configuration 3
Display virtual keyboard Configuration 4
Predefined keypad layouts are installed on the Dolphin 70e Black.
Virtual keypad layout can also be selected on the Options3 (page 2-12) tab.
Virtual Keypad Displayed
9 - 12
Command
Description
Identifier on Options 3 tab
/cmd!2;00/cmde
VK off
(or hide if
currently
displayed)
None
/cmd!2;10/cmde
VK layout 1
(Left Numeric)
Orientation 0
Left Numeric
/cmd!2;20/cmde
VK layout 2
(Right Numeric)
Orientation 0
Right Numeric
/cmd!2;30/cmde
VK layout 3
(Qwerty or SIP)
Orientation 0
Qwerty or SIP
Virtual Keypad Displayed
Command
Description
Identifier on Options 3 tab
/cmd!2;40/cmde
VK layout 4
(HX2 Emulator)
Orientation 0
HX2 Emulator
9 - 13
Tecton and MX7 Key Maps
Del
BkSp
32-key Keypad
55-key Primary
Delete Keypad
55-key IBM
5250 Keypad
55-key Primary
Backspace Keypad
The MX7 Tecton keypads are shown above. The MX7 keypad is similar except for the “Tecton” logo and the position of the
“MX7” logo.
Note: The 55-key Primary Delete keypad has a primary delete key. The 55-key Primary Backspace keypad has a primary
backspace key. All other keys are the same.
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
Unless otherwise noted, key maps in this section are valid for the MX7 Tecton with either a Microsoft Windows CE 6.0 or Windows Mobile 6.5 operating system.
When using a sequence of keys that includes the Orange or Blue keys, press the color key first then the rest of the key
sequence unless otherwise noted in the tables. Ctrl, Alt, Shft, Blue and Orange keys are “sticky keys”. They do not need to be
held down before pressing the next (or desired) key. It is valid to use combined modifiers on specific keys.
Alphabetic keys default to lower case letters. Press the Shft key, then the alphabetic key for an uppercase letter.
Note: When the computer boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or CapsLock) condition can be
toggled with Blue plus Tab key sequence.
9 - 14
RFTerm Functions - MX7 and MX7 Tecton
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 55-Key Keypad
The keymaps below apply to both the 55-key Primary Delete and 55-key Primary Backspace keypads.
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Ctl Shft C
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctl Shft D
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Ctl Shft L
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Ctl Shft M
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctl Shft T
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctl Shft K
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(N/A with Windows Mobile)
Ctl Shft B
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Ctl Shft N
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Ctl Shft E
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctl Shft Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctl Shft Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctl Shft 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Ctl Shft P
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Ctl Shft I
Display > InputTool
Help
Ctl H
Scroll Up One Row
Shft Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Shft Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
Shft Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Shft Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
Exit the Emulator
Alt X
Ctl Shft X
File > Exit
9 - 15
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 32-Key Keypad
9 - 16
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Alph Ctl Shft 2 2 2
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Alph Ctl Shft 3
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Alph Ctl Shft 5 5 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Alph Ctl Shft 6
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Alph Ctl Shft 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Alph Ctl Shft 5 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(N/A with Windows Mobile)
Alph Ctl Shft 2 2
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Alph Ctl Shft 6 6
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Alph Ctl Shft 3 3
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctl Shft Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctl Shft Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctl Shft 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Alph Ctl Shft 7
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Alph Ctl Shft 4 4 4
Display > InputTool
Help
Alph Ctl 4 4
Scroll Up One Row
Shft Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Shft Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
Shft Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
Shft Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
Alph Alt 9 9
File > Exit
ANSI Functions - MX7 and MX7 Tecton
When running the RFTerm ANSI on the MX7 and MX7 Tecton refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the ANSI key functions.
Note: Physical keypad key presses and MX7 virtual keypad presses are the same.
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 55-Key Primary Delete Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Del
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Help
Alt X
Ctl Shft X
File > Exit
Ctl H
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
F6 - F10
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Supported
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Ctl Alt P
9 - 17
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 55-Key Primary Backspace Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
Bksp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Delete
Exit Program
Help
9 - 18
Press these keys in this order
Alt X
Ctl Shft X
File > Exit
Ctl H
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Supported
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Ctl Alt P
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 32-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Delete
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Alph Alt 9 9
File > Exit
Help
Alph Ctl 4 4
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
F6 - F10
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shift F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Supported
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Alph Ctl Alt 7
KeyBar
9 - 19
IBM 3270 Functions - MX7 and MX7 Tecton
When running the RFTerm IBM 3270 terminal emulator on the MX7 and MX7 Tecton refer to the 3270 Host Key
Descriptions (page 7-1) for explanations of the IBM 3270 functions.
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 55-Key Primary Delete Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Ctl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctl Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Ctl R
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Ctl Shft X
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Help
Ctl H
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Ctl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctl Alt P
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
9 - 20
Alt X
Alt T
Ctl Shft O
Session > Configure > FNKeys
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Ctl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctl 1 - 3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1- F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 55-Key Primary Backspace Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Ctl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
Bksp
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctl Bksp
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Ctl R
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Function Key Editor
Alt X
Ctl Shft X
Not Supported
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Ctl H
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Ctl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctl Alt P
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Status Line Toggle
Alt T
Ctl Shft O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Ctl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctl 1 - 3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1- F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 21
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 32-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
9 - 22
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Alph Ctl 2
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Alph Ctl 2 2 2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Alph Ctl 3
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
Orange Space
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctl Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Alph Ctl 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alph Alt 9 9
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Alph Ctl 4 4
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Alph Ctl 4 4 4
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Alph Ctl 6 6
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Alph Ctl Alt 7
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
Alph Alt 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Alph Ctl 7 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctl 1 - 3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1- F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
IBM 5250 Functions - MX7 and MX7 Tecton
When running the RFTerm IBM 5250 terminal emulator on MX7 and MX7 Tecton devices refer to the 5250 Host Key
Descriptions (page 8-1) for explanations of the IBM 5250 functions.
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 55-Key Primary Delete Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
Bksp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctl U
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctl Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Blue Alt
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alt X
Ctl Shft X
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Ctl Enter
Diamond 1
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
Ctl M
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctl L
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Ctl H
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctl Alt P
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Alt T
Ctl Shft O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Ctl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 23
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 55-Key Primary Backspace Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctl U
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctl Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Blue Alt
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Ctl Shft X
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Field Minus
Ctl Enter
Diamond 1
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Ctl M
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctl L
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Ctl H
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctl Alt P
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
9 - 24
Alt X
Alt T
Ctl Shft O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Ctl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
MX7 and MX7 Tecton 32-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Alph Ctl 2
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Alph Ctl 2 2 2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Alph Ctl 3
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Alph Ctl 8 8
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctl Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Blue Alt
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alph Alt 9 9
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Ctl Enter
Diamond 1
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
Alph Ctl 6
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Alph Ctl 5 5 5
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Alph Ctl 4 4
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Alph Ctl 4 4 4
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Alph Ctl 6 6
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Alph Alt 8
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Alph Alt 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Alph Ctl 7 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Orange Ctl F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 25
Thor VM1 Key Maps
SYS
UPS
SSD
SYS
UPS
SSD
12-key Keypad
Note: The 12-key keypad is available on a Thor VM1
running Windows CE 6.0.
64-key ANSI Keypad
SYS
UPS
SSD
Dup
Rst
Attn
SysReq
Ins
E-Inp
Del
Fld+
Clr
NL
Fld-
Field Exit
64-key IBM 5250 Keypad
64-key IBM 3270 Keypad
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
Alphabetic keys default to lower case letters. Press the Shift key, then the alphabetic key for an uppercase letter.
Note: When the computer boots, the default condition of CapsLock is Off. CapsLock can be toggled with 2nd plus Shift key
sequence.
9 - 26
RFTerm Functions - Thor VM1
Thor VM1 64-Key Keypad
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Ctrl Shift C
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctrl Shift D
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Ctrl Shift L
File > Settings > Display > Hide All
Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Ctrl Shift M
File > Settings > Display > Hide
MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctrl Shift T
File > Settings > Display > Hide
ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctrl Shift K
File > Settings > Display > Hide
KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(N/A with Windows Embedded Standard)
Ctrl Shift B
File > Settings > Display > At
Bottom
Configure Host Session
Ctrl Shift N
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Ctrl Shift E
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctrl Shift Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl Shift Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl Shift 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
(N/A with Windows Embedded Standard)
Ctrl Shift P
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
(N/A with Windows Embedded Standard)
Ctrl Shift I
Display > InputTool
Help
Ctrl H
Scroll Up One Row
Shift Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Shift Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
Shift Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
Shift Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
Ctrl Shift X
Alt X
File > Exit
9 - 27
Thor VM1 12-Key Keypad
The notation Not Defined in the following table indicates that no key combination provides this function in the default
key map. To obtain this function, some key (or combination of keys) must be remapped to provide key combination
specified earlier in RFTerm Functions - Virtual Keys (page 9-6).
Note: This keyboard is not available with the Microsoft Windows Embedded Standard operating system.
9 - 28
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Not Defined
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Not Defined
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Not Defined
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Not Defined
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Not Defined
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Not Defined
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Not Defined
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Not Defined
Display > InputTool
Help
Not Defined
Scroll Up One Row
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
Not Defined
File > Exit
ANSI Functions - Thor VM1
When running the RFTerm ANSI on the Thor VM1 refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the
ANSI key functions.
Note: Physical keypad key presses and Thor VM1 virtual keypad presses are the same.
Thor VM1 64-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BkSp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
2nd . (period)
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Help
Alt X
Shift Ctrl X
File > Exit
Ctrl H
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Shift F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F30
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F31 - F40
Ctrl F1 - F10
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
9 - 29
Thor VM1 12-Key Keypad
The notation Not Defined in the following table indicates that no key combination provides this function in the default
key map. To obtain this function, some key (or combination of keys) must be remapped to provide key combination
specified earlier in ANSI Functions - Virtual Keys (page 9-8).
Note: This keyboard is not available with the Microsoft Windows Embedded Standard operating system.
9 - 30
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Not Defined
File > Exit
Help
Not Defined
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Shift F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F30
Not Defined
KeyBar
F31 - F40
Not Defined
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Not Defined
IBM 3270 Functions - Thor VM1
When running the RFTerm IBM 3270 terminal emulator on the Thor VM1 refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 71) for explanations of the IBM 3270 functions.
Thor VM1 64-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
2nd Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Ctrl C
ESC
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
BkSp
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctrl BkSp
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Ctrl R
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alt X
Shift Ctrl X
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Help
Ctrl H
Homekey
Ctrl Left Arrow
2nd Home
Insert
Ctrl I
LDUB
Not Supported
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Alt F B
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Status Line Toggle
Alt T
Ctrl Shift O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Ctrl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl F1 - F3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Shift F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Alt F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 31
Thor VM1 12-Key Keypad
The notation Not Defined in the following table indicates that no key combination provides this function in the default
key map. To obtain this function, some key (or combination of keys) must be remapped to provide key combination
specified earlier in IBM 3270 Functions - Virtual Keys (page 9-9).
Note: This keyboard is not available with the Microsoft Windows Embedded Standard operating system.
9 - 32
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Not Defined
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Defined
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Not Defined
Homekey
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Defined
New Line Key
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Not Defined
RDUB
Not Defined
SW Rev
Not Defined
File > About
Window Down
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Shift F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Not Defined
KeyBar
IBM 5250 Functions - Thor VM1
When running the RFTerm IBM 5250 terminal emulator on Thor VM1 devices refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page
8-1) for explanations of the IBM 5250 functions.
Thor VM1 64-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11)for
details.
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
2nd Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
BkSp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctrl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctrl U
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctrl BkSp
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
ESC
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alt X
Ctrl Shift X
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Field Minus
Ctrl Enter
2nd Enter
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Ctrl M
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctrl L
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Ctrl H
Homekey
2nd Home
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Alt F B
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Sys_Req
Alt T
Ctrl Shift O
Ctrl S
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Shift F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Alt F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 33
Thor VM1 12-Key Keypad
The notation Not Defined in the following table indicates that no key combination provides this function in the default
key map. To obtain this function, some key (or combination of keys) must be remapped to provide key combination
specified earlier in IBM 5250 Functions - Virtual Keys (page 9-10).
Note: This keyboard is not available with the Microsoft Windows Embedded Standard operating system.
9 - 34
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Not Defined
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Defined
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Fastback
Not Defined
Fastfwd
Not Defined
Field Exit
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Not Defined
Homekey
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Defined
File > About
Window Down
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Shift F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Not Defined
KeyBar
Thor VM2 Key Maps
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
Integrated Keypad
SYS
UPS
Wi Fi
SSD
P1
P6
P2
P7
P3
P8
P4
P9
P5 P10
There are ten Programmable Keys on the Thor VM2 front bezel. These keys may be programmed to an RFTerm function
by the system administrator.
For pre-programmed functions, see:
•
•
•
•
RFTerm Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad (page 9-36)
ANSI Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad (page 9-36)
IBM 3270 Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad (page 9-36)
IBM 5250 Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad (page 9-36)
External 21-Key Numeric Keypad
The Thor VM2 supports the external 21-key numeric keypad. See 21-Key Numeric Keypad (page 9-39) for RFTerm keymaps for this optional keyboard.
External 95-Key Keyboard
The Thor VM2 supports the external 95-key keyboard. This keyboard may be a USB or PS/2 keyboard (see the Thor VM2
User’s Guide for hardware details). See 95-Key Keyboard (page 9-40) for RFTerm keymaps for this optional keyboard.
External 60-Key Keyboard
The Thor VM2 supports the external 60-key keyboard. See 60-Key Keyboard (page 9-44) for RFTerm keymaps for this
optional keyboard.
9 - 35
RFTerm Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad
By default, no RFTerm functions are assigned to the integrated keypad.
ANSI Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad
When running RFTerm ANSI on the Thor VM2 refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the
ANSI key functions.
By default, no ANSI functions are assigned to the integrated keypad keys except as noted below:
VM2 Key
Default Programmable Key Value
P1
F1
P2
F2
P3
F3
P4
F4
P5
F5
IBM 3270 Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad
When running RFTerm IBM 3270 on the Thor VM2 refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1) for explanations of
the IBM 3270 functions.
By default, no IBM 3270 functions are assigned to the integrated keypad keys except as noted below:
VM2 Key
Default Programmable Key Value
P1
F1
P2
F2
P3
F3
P4
F4
P5
F5
IBM 5250 Functions - Thor VM2 Integrated Keypad
When running RFTerm IBM 5250 on the Thor VM2 refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1) for explanations of
the IBM 5250 functions.
By default, no IBM 5250 functions are assigned to the integrated keypad keys except as noted below:
VM2 Key
Default Programmable Key Value
P1
F1
P2
F2
P3
F3
P4
F4
P5
F5
9 - 36
Thor VM3 Key Maps
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
Integrated Keypad
P1
P8
P2
P9
P3 P10
P4 P11
P5 P12
P6 P13
P7 P14
There are fourteen Programmable Keys on the Thor VM3 front bezel. These keys may be programmed to an RFTerm function by the system administrator.
For pre-programmed functions, see:
•
•
•
•
RFTerm Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad (page 9-38)
ANSI Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad (page 9-38)
IBM 3270 Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad (page 9-38)
IBM 5250 Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad (page 9-38)
External 21-Key Numeric Keypad
The Thor VM3 supports the external 21-key numeric keypad. See 21-Key Numeric Keypad (page 9-39) for RFTerm keymaps for this optional keyboard.
External 95-Key Keyboard
The Thor VM3 supports the external 95-key numeric keypad. This keyboard may be a USB or PS/2 keyboard (see the Thor
VM3 User’s Guide for hardware details). See 95-Key Keyboard (page 9-40) for RFTerm keymaps for this optional keyboard.
External 60-Key Keyboard
The Thor VM3 supports the external 60-key keyboard. See 60-Key Keyboard (page 9-44) for RFTerm keymaps for this
optional keyboard.
9 - 37
RFTerm Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad
By default, no RFTerm functions are assigned to the integrated keypad.
ANSI Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad
When running RFTerm ANSI on the Thor VM3 refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the
ANSI key functions.
By default, no ANSI functions are assigned to the integrated keypad keys except as noted below:
VM3 Key
Default Programmable Key Value
P1
F1
P2
F2
P3
F3
P4
F4
P5
F5
IBM 3270 Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad
When running RFTerm IBM 3270 on the Thor VM3 refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1) for explanations of
the IBM 3270 functions.
By default, no IBM 3270 functions are assigned to the integrated keypad keys except as noted below:
VM3 Key
Default Programmable Key Value
P1
F1
P2
F2
P3
F3
P4
F4
P5
F5
IBM 5250 Functions - Thor VM3 Integrated Keypad
When running RFTerm IBM 5250 on the Thor VM3 refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1) for explanations of
the IBM 5250 functions.
By default, no IBM 5250 functions are assigned to the integrated keypad keys except as noted below:
VM3 Key
Default Programmable Key Value
P1
F1
P2
F2
P3
F3
P4
F4
P5
F5
9 - 38
External Keyboards for Vehicle Mounted Computers
The following external keyboards may be available for vehicle mounted computers.
21-Key Numeric Keypad
The numeric keypad is pre-programmed for F1-F20 keys.
RFTerm Functions - External 21-Key Numeric Keypad
By default, no RFTerm functions are assigned to this keyboard.
ANSI Functions - External 21-Key Numeric Keypad
When running RFTerm ANSI on these devices refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of
the ANSI key functions.
The following ANSI functions are supported on the numeric keypad:
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
F1 - F10
Yellow 1 - 0
F11 - F20
Green 1 - 0
IBM 3270 Functions - External 21-Key Numeric Keypad
When running RFTerm IBM 3270 on these devices refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1) for explanations
of the IBM 3270 functions.
The following IBM 3270 functions are supported on the numeric keypad:
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
F1 - F10
Yellow 1 - 0
F11 - F20
Green 1 - 0
IBM 5250 Functions - Numeric Keypad
When running RFTerm IBM 5250 on these devices refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1) for explanations
of the IBM 5250 functions.
The following IBM 5250 functions are supported on the numeric keypad:
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
F1 - F10
Yellow 1 - 0
F11 - F20
Green 1 - 0
9 - 39
95-Key Keyboard
Esc
F1
~
F2
!
1
`
Tab
W
A
Shift
Z
Ctrl
$
%
4
5
E
S
F5
F4
#
3
@
2
Q
Caps
Lock
F3
X
^
6
R
D
T
F
C
F7
F6
V
*
(
)
8
9
0
U
I
J
N
M
Alt
+
=
{
[
P
:
;
L
<
,
>
.
Print
Screen
SysRq
F12
_
-
O
K
F11
F10
&
H
B
F9
7
Y
G
F8
BackSpace
}
]
"
'
?
/
Scroll
Lock
|
\
Enter
Shift
Alt
Break
Num
Lock
/
*
-
7
8
9
+
4
5
6
1
2
Home
PgUp
3
End
Ctrl
0
Ins
L
Fn
Pause
PgDn
.
Enter
Del
R
For the external 95-key keyboard:
• Set the On/Off condition of NumLock before pressing a key sequence.
• When the computer boots, the default condition of CapsLock is Off. The Caps condition can be toggled with a CapsLock
key.
RFTerm Functions - External 95-Key Keyboard
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Ctrl Shift C
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctrl Shift D
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Ctrl Shift L
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Ctrl Shift M
File > Settings > Display > Hide
MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctrl Shift T
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctrl Shift K
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(Windows CE and Windows
Embedded Compact only)
Ctrl Shift B
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Ctrl Shift N
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Ctrl Shift E
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctrl Shift Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl Shift Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl Shift 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
(Windows CE and Windows
Embedded Compact only)
Ctrl Shift P
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
(Windows CE and Windows
Embedded Compact only)
Ctrl Shift I
Display > InputTool
Help
Ctrl H
Scroll Up One Row
Shift Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Shift Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
Shift Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
Shift Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
9 - 40
Ctrl Shift X
Alt X
File > Exit
ANSI Functions - External 95-Key Keyboard
When running RFTerm ANSI on these devices refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of
the ANSI key functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BackSpace
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Del
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Alt X
Shift Ctrl X
File > Exit
Help
Ctrl H
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F30
Shift F1 - F10
KeyBar
F31 - F40
Ctrl F1 - F10
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
9 - 41
IBM 3270 Functions - External 95-Key Keyboard
When running RFTerm IBM 3270 on these devices refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1) for explanations
of the IBM 3270 functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Shift Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Backtab
Clear
Esc
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl D
Erase
BackSpace
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctrl BackSpace
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Ctrl R
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Function Key Editor
Help
Homekey
Alt X
Shift Ctrl X
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Del
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Ctrl H
Ctrl Left Arrow
Ctrl Home
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl I
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Alt F B
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
9 - 42
Ctrl C
Alt T
Shift Ctrl O
Display > SmartPad > Ins
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Ctrl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl F1 - F3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Shift F1 - F4
KeyBar
IBM 5250 Functions - External 95-Key Keyboard
When running RFTerm IBM 5250 on these devices refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1) for explanations
of the IBM 5250 functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Shift Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
BackSpace
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctrl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctrl U
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctrl BackSpace
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Esc
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Alt X
Ctrl Shift X
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
End
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Ctrl Enter
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Pause
Field Minus
Ctrl M
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctrl L
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Ctrl H
Homekey
Home
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Alt F B
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Sys_Req
Alt T
Ctrl Shift O
Ctrl S
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Shift F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 43
60-Key Keyboard
The 60-key keyboard may offered in three variations depending on the device.
ESC
CTRL
SHIFT
2ND
CAPS
BREAK
R/S
F1
F2
F3
@
!
|
E
;
\
A
ALT
$
#
W
%
T
F
G
F6
&
^
R
:
Y
Z
C
X
O
B
F4
F5
N
P
PgUp
?
K
_
V
F9
)
I
.
~
SP
(
*
J
H
F8
F7
U
,
‘
D
S
BKLT
F5
F4
L
Home
PgDn
CAPS
/
2nd
=
F10
INS
BKSP
ENTER
[
<
END
M
7
4
1
0
{
]
8
5
2
+
}
>
9
6
3
DEL
.
60-key ANSI Keyboard
PA1
ESC
2ND
PA3
PA2
CAPS
BREAK
R/S
F1
F2
F3
BKLT
F6
@
!
Q
Attn
SHIFT
|
$
#
W
E
;
\
%
R
&
^
T
S
,
:
D
G
F
O
P
Z
2nd
=
7
8
+
9
INS
BKSP
4
{
5
}
6
K
L
ENTER
[
1
]
2
>
3
NL
C
X
PgUp
?
J
H
_
~
SP
)
I
.
Clr
ALT
/
E-Inp
(
*
U
Y
CAPS
F10
Del
SysReq
A
F9
Ins
Rst
CTRL
F8
F7
V
B
F4
F5
N
Home
PgDn
<
END
M
0
DEL
.
60-key 3270 Keyboard
ESC
2ND
CAPS
BREAK
R/S
F1
F2
F3
BKLT
F6
Dup
CTRL
@
!
Q
Attn
SHIFT
|
E
;
S
%
R
&
^
T
:
D
F
G
H
SP
.
J
X
C
V
B
N
/
2nd
=
7
8
+
9
P
INS
BKSP
Field Exit
PgUp
L
ENTER
[
4
1
{
]
5
2
}
>
6
3
Fld-
_
~
Z
)
O
?
K
NL
Clr
ALT
I
Fld+
,
CAPS
F10
E-Inp
(
*
U
Y
F9
Ins
Del
SysReq
\
A
$
#
W
F8
F7
Home
M
PgDn
END
<
0
DEL
.
60-key 5250 Keyboard
For the 60-key keyboard:
• When using a sequence of keys that includes the 2ND key, press the 2ND key first then the rest of the key sequence.
• Set the On/Off condition of NumLock before pressing a key sequence. There is no visual indication of the condition of
NumLock.
• When the computer boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or CapsLock) condition can be
toggled with a 2ND-F1 key sequence. The CAPS LED is illuminated when CapsLock is On.
9 - 44
RFTerm Functions - 60-key Keyboard
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Ctrl SHIFT C
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctrl SHIFT D
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Ctrl SHIFT L
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctrl SHIFT T
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctrl SHIFT K
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(Windows CE and Windows
Embedded Compact only)
Ctrl SHIFT B
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Ctrl SHIFT N
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Ctrl SHIFT E
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctrl SHIFT Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl SHIFT Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl SHIFT 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
(Windows CE and Windows
Embedded Compact only)
Ctrl Shift P
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
(Windows CE and Windows
Embedded Compact only)
Ctrl Shift I
Display > InputTool
Help
Ctrl H
Scroll Up One Row
SHIFT Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
SHIFT Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
SHIFT Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
SHIFT Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
Ctrl SHIFT X
ALT X
File > Exit
9 - 45
ANSI Functions - 60-key Keyboard
When running RFTerm ANSI on these devices refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of
the ANSI key functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
2ND . (period)
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
9 - 46
ALT X
SHIFT Ctrl X
File > Exit
Help
Ctrl H
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
ALT F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F30
SHIFT F1 - F10
KeyBar
F31 - F40
Ctrl F1 - F10
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
ENTER
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Ctrl ALT P
IBM 3270 Functions - 60-key Keyboard
When running RFTerm IBM 3270 on these devices refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1) for explanations
of the IBM 3270 functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
2ND Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Backtab
Clear
Ctrl C
ESC
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl D
Erase
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctrl BKSP
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Ctrl R
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Function Key Editor
Help
Homekey
ALT X
SHIFT Ctrl X
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Del
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Ctrl H
Ctrl Left Arrow
2ND Home
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl I
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl ALT P
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
ALT F B
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
ALT T
Ctrl SHIFT O
Display > SmartPad > Ins
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Ctrl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl F1 - F3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
ALT F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 47
IBM 5250 Functions - 60-key Keyboard
When running RFTerm IBM 5250 on these devices refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1) for explanations
of the IBM 5250 functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
2ND Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctrl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctrl U
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctrl BKSP
Display > SmartPad > EIn
ESC
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Ctrl SHIFT X
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Ctrl ENTER
2ND ENTER
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
Ctrl M
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctrl L
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Ctrl H
Homekey
2ND Home
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl ALT P
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
ALT F B
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
ENTER
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
9 - 48
ALT X
ALT T
Ctrl SHIFT O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Ctrl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
ALT F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT F1 - F4
KeyBar
Marathon Key Maps
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
ESC
!
Q
_
F1
*
W
-
A
<
Z
F2
#
E
=
S
>
Tab
X
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
$
%
^
&
@
I
(
)
R
+
D
,
Fn
C
F
T
\
V
G
Y
:
H
B
SPACE
U
;
N
"
J
.
M
O
'
K
?
P
+
-
7
8
9
4
5
6
SHIFT
1
2
3
DEL
.
0
*
Bk
ENT
L
/
CTL
F 10 NUM
LCK
ALT
• There is no 2ND key on this keyboard.
• Set the On/Off condition of NumLock before pressing a key sequence. When NumLock is On, the NumLck key is backlit
amber. When NumLock is Off, the NumLck key backlight is off.
• When the computer boots, the default condition of CapsLock is Off. The Caps condition can be toggled with the Shift key.
Press and hold the Shift key for approximately 1.5 seconds to enter CapsLock mode. The blue LED on the Shift key remains
lit while in CapsLock mode.
9 - 49
RFTerm Functions - Marathon
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Ctl Shift C
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctl Shift D
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Ctl Shift L
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctl Shift T
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctl Shift K
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Configure Host Session
Ctl Shift N
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Ctl Shift E
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctl Shift Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctl Shift Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctl Shift 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Ctl Shift P
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Ctl Shift I
Display > InputTool
Help
Scroll Up One Row
Scroll Down One Row
Scroll Left One Row
Scroll Right One Row
Exit the Emulator
9 - 50
Ctl H
Ctl Down Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 2 (NumLck on)
Ctl Left Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 4 (NumLck on)
Ctl Right Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 6 (NumLck on)
Ctl Up Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 8 (NumLck on)
Ctl Shift X
Alt X
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
File > Exit
ANSI Functions - Marathon
When running the RFTerm ANSI on the Marathon refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the
ANSI key functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BkSp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
DEL
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Delete
Exit Program
Help
Alt X
Shift Ctl X
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
File > Exit
Ctl H
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F30
Shift F1 - F10
KeyBar
F31 - F40
Ctl F1 - F10
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Window Left
Window Right
Window Up
Print Screen
Ctl Down Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 2 (NumLck on)
Ctl Left Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 4 (NumLck on)
Ctl Right Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 6 (NumLck on)
Ctl Up Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 8 (NumLck on)
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Ctl Alt P
9 - 51
IBM 3270 Functions - Marathon
When running the RFTerm IBM 3270 terminal emulator on the Marathon refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1)
for explanations of the IBM 3270 functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Shift Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Ctl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
BkSp
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctl BkSp
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Ctl R
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Alt X
Shift Ctl X
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Help
Ctl H
Homekey
Ctl Left Arrow
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Ctl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctl Alt P
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Window Down
Window Right
Window Left
Window Up
Status Line Toggle
Alt F B
Ctl Down Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 2 (NumLck on)
Ctl Left Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 4 (NumLck on)
Ctl Right Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 6 (NumLck on)
Ctl Up Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 8 (NumLck on)
Alt T
Session > Configure > FNKeys
File > About
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Shift Ctl O
SYS_REQ
Ctl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctl F1 - F3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Shift F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 52
IBM 5250 Functions - Marathon
When running the RFTerm IBM 5250 terminal emulator on the Marathon refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1)
for explanations of the IBM 5250 functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Shift Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
BkSp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctl U
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctl BkSp
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Esc
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alt X
Ctl Shift X
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Fastback
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Ctl Enter
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
Ctl M
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctl L
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Ctl H
Homekey
Ctrl Home
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctl Alt P
Display > SmartPad > Prt
Alt F B
File > About
SW REV
Window Down
Window Right
Window Left
Window Up
Send or Entercatv
Status Line Toggle
Ctl Down Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 2 (NumLck on)
Ctl Left Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 4 (NumLck on)
Ctl Right Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 6 (NumLck on)
Ctl Up Arrow (NumLck off)
Ctl Shift 8 (NumLck on)
Enter
Alt T
Ctl Shift O
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Scroll Bars
Display > SmartPad > Ent
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Ctl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Shift F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 53
HX2 Key Maps
Dual Alpha Keypads
Triple Tap Keypads
C
DE
F
JKL
MN
O
TU
WXY
AB
GH
I
P QR
Z
S
V
S pc
E
SC
T
AB
Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
When using a sequence of keys that includes the Blue, Orange, Green or Light Blue key, press the color key first then the
rest of the key sequence unless otherwise noted in the tables. Ctrl, Shift, Blue, Light Blue and Orange keys (not all keys are
present on each keyboard) are “sticky keys”. They do not need to be held down before pressing the next (or desired) key.
By default, the Green key (when present) is not sticky. However the Green key can be configured to be sticky via the Start >
Settings > Control Panel > HX2-3 Options > Misc tab.
User defined keys can be set using Start > Settings > Control Panel > Keypad and selecting the Key Map tab. Refer to the
HX2 Reference Guide for details.
Important Note for Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad
When running an HX2 with an Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad, RFTerm hijacks virtual function keys F11 through F19 to perform
the RFTerm functions indicated in the HX2 Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad (page 9-57) key map for the Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad. This hijacking occurs only if the HX2 Function Key Enable (page 3-35) option is not selected. If HX2 Function Key
Enable is selected, the key map reverts to the standard RFTerm virtual key map RFTerm Functions - Virtual Keys (page 96).
9 - 54
RFTerm Functions - HX2
HX2 Dual Alpha Keypad
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Ctrl SHIFT Orange 2
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 2
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 6
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Ctrl SHIFT Orange 7
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue Up Arrow
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctrl SHIFT Orange 6
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 1
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 7
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Ctrl SHIFT Orange 3
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctrl SHIFT Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl SHIFT Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl SHIFT 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 8
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Ctrl SHIFT Orange 5
Display > InputTool
Help
Ctrl Light Blue 4
Scroll Up One Row
SHIFT Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
SHIFT Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
SHIFT Green Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
SHIFT Green Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
Green Ctrl Light Blue BKSP
File > Exit
9 - 55
HX2 Triple Tap Keypad
9 - 56
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 2 2 2
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 3
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 5 5 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 6
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 5 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 2 2
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 6 6
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 3 3
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctrl SHIFT Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl SHIFT Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl SHIFT 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 7
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Ctrl SHIFT Light Blue 4 4 4
Display > InputTool
Help
Ctrl Light Blue 4 4
Scroll Up One Row
SHIFT Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
SHIFT Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
SHIFT Green Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
SHIFT Green Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
Green Ctrl Light Blue 9 9
File > Exit
HX2 Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad
The notation Not Defined in the following table indicates that no key combination provides this function in the default
key map. To obtain this function, some key (or combination of keys) must be remapped to provide key combination
specified in RFTerm Functions - Virtual Keys (page 9-6).
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Blue 7
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Blue 7
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Blue 6
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Blue 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Blue 4
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Blue 3
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Blue 8
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Blue 9
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Blue 2
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Blue 1
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Not Defined
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Not Defined
Display > InputTool
Help
Not Defined
Scroll Up One Row
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
Blue Bksp
File > Exit
9 - 57
ANSI Functions - HX2
When running the RFTerm ANSI on the HX2 refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the ANSI
key functions.
HX2 Dual Alpha Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
9 - 58
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Orange Light Blue 1
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Green Ctrl Light Blue BKSP
File > Exit
Help
Ctrl Light Blue 4
F1 - F10
Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F11 - F20
SHIFT Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT Green Light Blue 1 - 4
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Supported
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Green Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Green Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Green Ctrl Light Blue 8
HX2 Triple Tap Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Orange Light Blue 1
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Green Ctrl Light Blue 9 9
File > Exit
Help
Ctrl Light Blue 4 4
F1 - F10
Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F11 - F20
SHIFT Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT Green Light Blue 1 - 4
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Supported
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Green Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Green Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Green Ctrl Light Blue 7
9 - 59
HX2 Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad
The notation Not Defined in the following table indicates that no key combination provides this function in the default
key map. To obtain this function, some key (or combination of keys) must be remapped to provide key combination
specified earlier in the ANSI Functions - Virtual Keys (page 9-8) table.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
!
If using an HX2 with the Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad, review the Important Note for Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad
(page 9-54). It contains important information on the function of keys F11 through F19 on this HX2 keypad.
ANSI Function
9 - 60
Press these HX2 keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
Bksp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Blue Bksp
File > Exit
Help
Not Defined
F1 - F4
F1-F4
KeyBar
F5 - F8
Blue F1 - F4
KeyBar
F9
Not Defined
KeyBar
F10
Blue 0
KeyBar
F11 - F19
Not Supported
KeyBar
F20
Not Defined
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Not Defined
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Defined
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Not Defined
IBM 3270 Functions - HX2
When running the RFTerm IBM 3270 terminal emulator on the HX2 refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1) for
explanations of the IBM 3270 functions.
HX2 Dual Alpha Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl Orange 1
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Green TAB
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Ctrl Orange 2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl Light Blue 2
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctrl BKSP
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Ctrl Light Blue 9
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Green Ctrl Light Blue BKSP
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Ctrl Light Blue 4
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl Orange 5
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Ctrl Light Blue 7
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Green Ctrl Light Blue 8
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Supported
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Green Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Green Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
File > About
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
Green Ctrl Light Blue Up Arrow
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Ctrl Orange Up Arrow
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl 1-3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F11 - F20
SHIFT Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT Green Light Blue 1 - 4
KeyBar
9 - 61
HX2 Triple Tap Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
9 - 62
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl Light Blue 2
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Green TAB
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Ctrl Light Blue 2 2 2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl Light Blue 3
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctrl BKSP
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Ctrl Light Blue 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Green Ctrl Light Blue 9 9
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Ctrl Light Blue 4 4
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl Light Blue 4 4 4
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Ctrl Light Blue 6 6
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Green Ctrl Light Blue 7
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Supported
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Green Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
File > About
Window Left
Ctrl Green Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
Green Ctrl Light Blue 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Ctrl Light Blue 7 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl 1 - 3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F11 - F20
SHIFT Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT Green Light Blue 1 - 4
KeyBar
HX2 Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad
The notation Not Defined in the following table indicates that no key combination provides this function in the default
key map. To obtain this function, some key (or combination of keys) must be remapped to provide key combination
specified earlier in the IBM 3270 Functions - Virtual Keys (page 9-9) table.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
!
If using an HX2 with the Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad, review the Important Note for Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad
(page 9-54). It contains important information on the function of keys F11 through F19 on this HX2 keypad.
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Blue Left Arrow
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
Bksp
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Blue Bksp
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Not Defined
Homekey
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Blue Right Arrow
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Not Defined
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Defined
File > About
Window Down
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F4
F1-F4
KeyBar
F5 - F8
Blue F1 - F4
KeyBar
F9
Not Defined
KeyBar
F10
Blue 0
KeyBar
F11 - F19
Not Supported
KeyBar
F20 - F24
Not Defined
KeyBar
9 - 63
IBM 5250 Functions - HX2
When running the RFTerm IBM 5250 terminal emulator on HX2 devices refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1)
for explanations of the IBM 5250 functions.
HX2 Dual Alpha Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
9 - 64
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl Orange 1
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Green TAB
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctrl Orange 2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl Light Blue 2
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctrl Orange 0
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctrl BKSP
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
ESC
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Green Ctrl Light Blue BKSP
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Ctrl Enter
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
Ctrl Orange 7
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctrl Light Blue 6
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Ctrl Light Blue 4
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl Orange 5
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl Light Blue 7
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Green Ctrl Light Blue 8
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Green Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Green Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Green Ctrl Light Blue Up Arrow
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Ctrl Orange Up Arrow
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F11 - F20
SHIFT Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT Green Light Blue 1 - 4
KeyBar
HX2 Triple Tap Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl Light Blue 2
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Green TAB
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctrl Light Blue 2 2 2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl Light Blue 3
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctrl Light Blue 8 8
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctrl BKSP
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
ESC
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Green Ctrl Light Blue 9 9
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Ctrl Enter
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
Ctrl Light Blue 6
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctrl Light Blue 5 5 5
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Ctrl Light Blue 4 4
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl Light Blue 4 4 4
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl Light Blue 6 6
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Green Ctrl Light Blue 7
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Green Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Green Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Green Ctrl Light Blue 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Ctrl Light Blue 7 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F11 - F20
SHIFT Green 1 - 0
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT Green Light Blue 1-4
KeyBar
9 - 65
HX2 Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad
The notation Not Defined in the following table indicates that no key combination provides this function in the default
key map. To obtain this function, some key (or combination of keys) must be remapped to provide key combination
specified earlier in the IBM 5250 Functions - Virtual Keys (page 9-10) table.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
!
9 - 66
If using an HX2 with the Alpha Mode 3 Tap keypad, review the Important Note for Alpha Mode 3 Tap Keypad
(page 9-54). It contains important information on the function of keys F11 through F19 on this HX2 keypad.
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Blue Left Arrow
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
Bksp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Blue Bksp
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Blue Enter
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Not Defined
Homekey
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Blue Right Arrow
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Not Defined
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Not Defined
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Not Defined
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F4
F1 - F4
KeyBar
F5 - F8
Blue F1 - F4
KeyBar
F9
Not Defined
KeyBar
F10
Blue 0
KeyBar
F11 - F19
Not Supported
KeyBar
F20 - F24
Not Defined
KeyBar
MX3Plus, MX3X, VX3Plus and VX3X Key Maps
2nd
ALT
CTRL
SHFT
CAPS
SCAN
BATT
STAT
BATT
B
Esc
2nd
CAPS
!
@
Q
Ctrl
Shft
Alt
Spc
F3
F2
W
#
A
\
|
BkLt
Break
F1
Z
E
$
S
:
R
%
D
;
X
F5
F4
C
T
^
F
V
Y
F6
&
G
~
B
`
CHGR
M
F8
F7
U
*
I
(
H
,
J
.
N
_
M
F9
O
)
K
?
P
L
F10
Ins
BkSp
PgUp
/
PgDn
=
Home
[
End
<
Enter
7
-
4
{
1
]
0
Del
8
+
9
5
}
6
2
>
3
The MX3Plus keypad is shown above. The MX3X keypad is similar except there is an “MX3X” logo above the F9 and F10 keys.
2nd
Esc
Ctrl
Alt
ALT
CTRL
2nd
CAPS
!
@
Q
Shft
Spc
SHFT
STAT
BkLt
Break
F1
|
CAPS
W
A
Z
F3
F2
#
\
E
$
S
:
X
R
%
D
;
C
F5
F4
T
^
F
V
Y
F6
&
G
~
B
`
F8
F7
U
*
H
,
N
_
I
J
M
(
.
O
K
F9
)
?
P
L
Enter
F10
Ins
BkSp
PgUp
/
7
-
8
+
9
PgDn
=
4
{
5
}
6
Home
[
1
]
2
>
3
End
<
0
Del
The VX3Plus keypad is shown above. The VX3X keypad is similar except there is a “VX3X” logo above the F9 and F10 keys.
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
When using a sequence of keys that includes the 2nd key, press the 2nd key first then the rest of the key sequence. Set the On/
Off condition of NumLock before pressing a key sequence. There is no visual indication of the condition of NumLock.
Note: When the computer boots, the default condition of NumLock is On.
Note: When the computer boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or CapsLock) condition can be
toggled with a 2nd - F1 key sequence. The CAPS LED is illuminated when CapsLock is On.
9 - 67
RFTerm Functions - MX3Plus / MX3X / VX3Plus / VX3X
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Ctrl Shft C
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctrl Shft D
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Ctrl Shft L
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Ctrl Shft M
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctrl Shft T
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctrl Shft K
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
Ctrl Shft B
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Ctrl Shft N
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Ctrl Shft E
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctrl Shft Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl Shft Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl Shft 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Ctrl Shft P
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Ctrl Shft I
Display > InputTool
Help
Ctrl H
Scroll Up One Row
Shft Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Shft Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
Shft Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Shft Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
Exit the Emulator
9 - 68
Ctrl Shft X
Alt X
File > Exit
ANSI Functions - MX3Plus / MX3X / VX3Plus / VX3X
When running the RFTerm ANSI on these devices refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the
ANSI key functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BkSp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
2nd . (period)
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Delete
Exit Program
Help
Alt X
Shft Ctrl X
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
File > Exit
Ctrl H
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F30
Shft F1 - F10
KeyBar
F31 - F40
Ctrl F1 - F10
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
9 - 69
IBM 3270 Functions - MX3Plus / MX3X / VX3Plus / VX3X
When running the RFTerm IBM 3270 terminal emulator on these devices refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 71) for explanations of the IBM 3270 functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
2nd Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Ctrl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
BkSp
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctrl BkSp
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Ctrl R
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Alt X
Shft Ctrl X
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Ctrl H
Homekey
Ctrl Left Arrow
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Alt F B
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Status Line Toggle
Alt T
Shft Ctrl O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Ctrl S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl F1 - F3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Shft F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 70
IBM 5250 Functions - MX3Plus / MX3X / VX3Plus / VX3X
When running the RFTerm IBM 5250 terminal emulator on these devices refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 81) for explanations of the IBM 5250 functions.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
2nd Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
BkSp
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctrl C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl D
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctrl U
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctrl BkSp
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Esc
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alt X
Ctrl Shft X
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Field Minus
Ctrl Enter
2nd Enter
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Ctrl M
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctrl L
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Ctrl H
Homekey
2nd Home
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt P
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Alt F B
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Right Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Left Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Sys_Req
Alt T
Ctrl Shft O
Ctrl S
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Alt F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Shft F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 71
MX8 Key Maps
F3
F4
F3
F4
F2
F5
F2
F5
F1
1
F1
1
Shft
Tab
Tab
Enter
Enter
Shft
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
8
9
Alt
0
Spc
Alt
0
Spc
Ctrl
Alph
Del
Ctrl
Alph
Del
2
3
Triple Tap Keypad
2
3
Alpha Mode Keypad
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
Unless otherwise noted, key maps in this section are valid for the MX8 with either a Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 or Windows
Mobile 6.1 operating system.
When using a sequence of keys that includes the Orange or Blue keys, press the color key first then the rest of the key
sequence unless otherwise noted in the tables. Ctrl, Alt, Shft, Blue and Orange keys are “sticky keys”. They do not need to be
held down before pressing the next (or desired) key. It is valid to use combined modifiers on specific keys.
Alphabetic keys default to lower case letters. Press the Shft key, then the alphabetic key for an uppercase letter.
Note: When the computer boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or CapsLock) condition can be
toggled with Blue plus Tab key sequence.
9 - 72
RFTerm Functions - MX8
MX8 Triple Tap Keypad
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Alph Ctrl Shft 2 2 2
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Alph Ctrl Shft 3
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Alph Ctrl Shft 5 5 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Alph Ctrl Shft 6
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Alph Ctrl Shft 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Alph Ctrl Shft 5 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(N/A with Windows Mobile)
Alph Ctrl Shft 2 2
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Alph Ctrl Shft 6 6
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Alph Ctrl Shft 3 3
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctrl Shft Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl Shft Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl Shft 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Alph Ctrl Shft 7
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Alph Ctrl Shft 4 4 4
Display > InputTool
Help
Alph Ctrl 4 4
Scroll Up One Row
Shft Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Shft Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
Shft Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
Shft Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
Alph Alt 9 9
File > Exit
9 - 73
MX8 Alpha Mode Keypad
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
Ctrl Shft Alph F2
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
Ctrl Shft Alph F5
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
Ctrl Shft Alph 2
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
Ctrl Shft Alph 3
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
Ctrl Shft Alph Alt
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
Ctrl Shft Alph 1
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(N/A with Windows Mobile)
Ctrl Shft Alph F4
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
Ctrl Shft Alph 4
Session > Configure
Application Settings
Ctrl Shft Alph F1
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctrl Shft Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl Shft Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl Shft 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
Ctrl Shft Alph 6
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
Ctrl Shft Alph Tab
Display > InputTool
Help
Ctrl Alph Up Arrow
Scroll Up One Row
Shft Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
Shft Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
Shft Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
Shft Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
9 - 74
Alt Alph Del
Ctrl Shft Alph Del
File > Exit
ANSI Functions - MX8
When running the RFTerm ANSI on the MX8 refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the
ANSI key functions.
Note: Physical keypad key presses and MX8 virtual keypad presses are the same.
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
MX8 Triple Tap Keypad
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Del
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Alph Alt 9 9
File > Exit
Help
Alph Ctrl 4 4
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctrl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Supported
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Alph Ctrl Alt 7
9 - 75
MX8 Alpha Mode Keypad
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Del
Display > SmartPad > DEL
Exit Program
Ctrl Shft Alph Del
File > Exit
Help
Ctrl Alph Up Arrow
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
F11 - F15
9 - 76
Alt Alph Del
Blue 1 - 5
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
F21 - F24
Ctrl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Supported
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt Alph 6
IBM 3270 Functions - MX8
When running the RFTerm IBM 3270 terminal emulator on the MX8 refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1) for
explanations of the IBM 3270 functions.
MX8 Triple Tap Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Alph Ctrl 2
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Alph Ctrl 2 2 2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Alph Ctrl 3
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
Orange Space
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctrl Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Alph Ctrl 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alph Alt 9 9
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Alph Ctrl 4 4
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Alph Ctrl 4 4 4
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Alph Ctrl 6 6
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Alph Ctrl Alt 7
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Supported
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
Alph Alt 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Alph Ctrl 7 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl 1 - 3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1- F5
KeyBar
F11 - F21
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctrl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
File > About
9 - 77
MX8 Alpha Mode Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl Alph F3
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Clear
Ctrl Alph F2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl Alph F5
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctrl Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Ctrl Alph 8
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Function Key Editor
Ctrl Shft Alph Del
Not Supported
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Ctrl Alph Up Arrow
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Ctrl Alph Tab
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
Ctrl Alph 4
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt Alph 6
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Status Line Toggle
Alt Alph Alt
Ctrl Shft Alph 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
Ctrl Alph 9
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl 1 - 3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
Orange F1- F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
F11 - F21
9 - 78
Alt Alph Del
Blue 1 - 5
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Ctrl Orange F1 - F4
KeyBar
IBM 5250 Functions - MX8
When running the RFTerm IBM 5250 terminal emulator on MX8 devices refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1)
for explanations of the IBM 5250 functions.
MX8 Triple Tap Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Alph Ctrl 2
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Alph Ctl 2 2 2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Alph Ctl 3
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Alph Ctl 8 8
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Orange Ctl Spc
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Blue Alt
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Alph Alt 9 9
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Field Minus
Ctl Enter
Diamond 1
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Alph Ctl 6
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Alph Ctl 5 5 5
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
Alph Ctl 4 4
Homekey
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
Alph Ctl 4 4 4
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Alph Ctl 6 6
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Alph Alt 8
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Alph Alt 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Alph Ctl 7 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
F11 - F15
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Orange Ctl F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 79
MX8 Alpha Mode Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
Ctrl Alph F3
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
Ctrl Alph F2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
Ctrl Alph F5
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
Ctrl Alph 0
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctrl Orange Spc
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
Orange Alt
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
Ctrl Shft Alph Del
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Ctrl Enter
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
Ctrl Alph 3
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
Ctrl Alph 2
Display > SmartPad > F+
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
Ctrl Alph Up Arrow
Homekey
Not Supported
Insert
Ctrl Alph Tab
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
Ctrl Alph 4
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Next or Tab
Tab
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
Ctrl Alt Alph 6
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
Enter
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
Alt Alph Alt
Ctrl Shft Alph 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
Ctrl Alph 9
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F5
F1 - F5
KeyBar
Orange F1 - F5
KeyBar
F6 - F10
F11 - F15
9 - 80
Alt Alph Del
Blue 1 - 5
Blue F1 - F5
KeyBar
F16 - F20
Shft F1 - F5
KeyBar
F21 - F24
Orange Ctl F1 - F4
KeyBar
TAB
1
4
7
Dn
Pg
1
4
7
_
[
/
GHI
PQRS
@
?
:
=
ESC
(
'
ALPHA
"
JKL
TUV
]
DEF
,
$
3
6
9
SPC
BS
|
MNO
WXYZ
^
F
F
F
F
B
;
.
G
F
?
!
)
|
!
ALT
_
L
K
H
F10
Q
U
V
]
n
gD
1
#
> *
E
,
Ins
,
/
J
I
(
O
N
\
%
R
S
W
X
Caps
TAB
ALT
Ins
CTL
@
Z
p
gU
D
M
$
P
F5
ENTER
C
< '
15
F9
:
&
CTRL
F4
3
6
9
~
A
;
Ins
14
F8
2
5
8
0
-
+
Del
ABC
2
5
8
0
F7
F6
Up
Pg
ENTER
2
18
F3
20
BKSP
SPC
13
16
F10
+
F2
P
F9
F
F5
19
Del
15
12
P
F8
-
Caps
F
F
18
F4
F
F7
F6
14
F3
F
F
F
17
F1
13
F2
16
1
F
12
F1
F
11
F
F
*
F
MX9 Key Maps
=
T
}
^
[
Y
SHFT
)
SHIFT
38-key Keypad
ESC
62-key Keypad
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
Unless otherwise noted, key maps in this section are valid for the MX9 with either a Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 or Windows
Mobile 6.5 operating system.
When using a sequence of keys that includes the Orange or Blue keys, press the color key first then the rest of the key
sequence unless otherwise noted in the tables. Ctrl, Alt, Shift, Blue and Orange keys are “sticky keys”. They do not need to
be held down before pressing the next (or desired) key. It is valid to use combined modifiers on specific keys.
Alphabetic keys default to lower case letters. Press the Shift key, then the alphabetic key for an uppercase letter.
Note: When the computer boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or CapsLock) condition can be
toggled with Blue plus Tab key sequence.
9 - 81
RFTerm Functions - MX9
MX9 38-Key Keypad
RFTerm Function
9 - 82
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 2 2 2
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 3
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 5 5 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 6
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 5 5
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(N/A with Windows Mobile)
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 2 2
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 6 6
Session > Configure
Application Settings
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 3 3
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
Ctrl SHIFT Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
Ctrl SHIFT Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
Ctrl SHIFT 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 7
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
ALPHA Ctrl SHIFT 4 4 4
Display > InputTool
Help
ALPHA Ctrl 4 4
Scroll Up One Row
SHIFT Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
SHIFT Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
SHIFT Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
SHIFT Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
ALPHA ALT 9 9
File > Exit
MX9 62-Key Keypad
RFTerm Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Connect to Host
CTL SHFT C
Session > Connect
Disconnect from Host
CTL SHFT D
Session > Disconnect
Hide / Display All Bars
CTL SHFT L
File > Settings > Display > Hide All Bars
Hide / Display MenuBar
CTL SHFT M
File > Settings > Display > Hide MenuBar
Hide / Display ToolBar
CTL SHFT T
File > Settings > Display > Hide ToolBar
Hide / Display KeyBar
CTL SHFT K
File > Settings > Display > Hide KeyBar
Toggle MenuBar Bottom / Top
(N/A with Windows Mobile)
CTL SHFT B
File > Settings > Display > At Bottom
Configure Host Session
CTL SHFT N
Session > Configure
Application Settings
CTL SHFT E
File > Settings
Increase Font Size
CTL SHFT Up Arrow
Display > Font Up
Decrease Font Size
CTL SHFT Down Arrow
Display > Font Down
Toggle Font Bold / Normal
CTL SHFT 1
Session > Configure > Font Tab
Display/Hide SmartPad
CTL SHFT P
Display > SmartPad
Display / Hide Text Input
CTL SHFT I
Display > InputTool
Help
CTL H
Scroll Up One Row
SHFT Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Down One Row
SHFT Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Left One Row
SHFT Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Scroll Right One Row
SHFT Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Exit the Emulator
ALT X
CTL SHFT X
File > Exit
9 - 83
ANSI Functions - MX9
When running the RFTerm ANSI on the MX9 refer to the VT Host Key Descriptions (page 5-72) for explanations of the
ANSI key functions.
Note: Physical keypad key presses and MX9 virtual keypad presses are the same.
MX9 38-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
9 - 84
Press these keys in this order
Orange BKSP
Ctrl D
Exit Program
ALPHA ALT 9 9
Help
ALPHA Ctrl 4 4
Display > SmartPad > DEL
File > Exit
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Blue F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT F1 - F4
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Supported
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
ENTER
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
ALPHA Ctrl Alt 7
MX9 62-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
ANSI Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Answerback
Not Supported
Display > SmartPad > Ans
Backspace
BS
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Delete
Exit Program
Orange BS
CTL D
ALT X
CTL SHFT X
Display > SmartPad > DEL
File > Exit
Help
CTL H
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Blue F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHFT F1 - F4
KeyBar
F25 - F40
Not Supported
KeyBar
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Send
ENTER
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Window Down
CTL Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
CTL Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
CTL Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
CTL Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Print Screen
CTL ALT P
9 - 85
IBM 3270 Functions - MX9
When running the RFTerm IBM 3270 terminal emulator on the MX9 refer to the 3270 Host Key Descriptions (page 7-1) for
explanations of the IBM 3270 functions.
MX9 38-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Attn
Backtab
Clear
Delete
9 - 86
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
ALPHA Ctrl 2
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Orange TAB
SHIFT TAB
ALPHA Ctrl 2 2 2
ALPHA Ctrl 3
Orange BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
Ctrl BKSP
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
ALPHA Ctrl 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
ALPHA ALT 9 9
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
ALPHA Ctrl 4 4
Homekey
Orange SHIFT Down Arrow
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
ALPHA Ctrl 4 4 4
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
ALPHA Ctrl 6 6
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
ALPHA Ctrl ALT 7
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Status Line Toggle
ALPHA ALT 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
ALPHA Ctrl 7 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
Ctrl 1 - 3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Blue F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT F1 - F4
KeyBar
MX9 62-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
3270 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
CTL A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Clear
Delete
Orange TAB
SHFT TAB
CTL C
CTL D
Orange BS
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Display > SmartPad > Del
Erase
BS
Display > SmartPad > Bsp
Erase Input
CTL BS
Display > SmartPad > EIn
CTL R
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Error Reset or Reset
Exit Program
Function Key Editor
ALT X
CTL SHFT X
Not Supported
File > Exit
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Help
CTL H
Homekey
Orange SHFT Down Arrow
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
CTL I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
LDUB
Not Supported
New Line Key
CTL N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
CTL ALT P
RDUB
Not Supported
SW Rev
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
CTL Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
CTL Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
CTL Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
CTL Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Status Line Toggle
ALT T
CTL SHFT O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
SYS_REQ
CTL S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
PA1 - PA3
CTL 1 - 3
Display > SmartPad > Pa1 - Pa3
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Blue F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHFT F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 87
IBM 5250 Functions - MX9
When running the RFTerm IBM 5250 terminal emulator on MX9 devices refer to the 5250 Host Key Descriptions (page 8-1)
for explanations of the IBM 5250 functions.
MX9 38-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Attn
Backtab
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
ALPHA Ctrl 2
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Orange Tab
SHIFT Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
Char Backspace
BKSP
Display > SmartPad > BSp
Clear
ALPHA Ctrl 2 2 2
Display > SmartPad > Clr
Delete
9 - 88
Press these keys in this order
ALPHA Ctrl 3
Orange BKSP
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
ALPHA Ctrl 8 8
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
Ctrl BKSP
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
ESC
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
ALPHA ALT 9 9
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
Ctrl ENTER
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
ALPHA Ctrl 6
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
ALPHA Ctrl 5 5 5
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
ALPHA Ctrl 4 4
Homekey
Orange SHIFT Down Arrow
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
ALPHA Ctrl 4 4 4
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
ALPHA Ctrl 6 6
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
ALPHA Ctrl ALT 8
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
Ctrl Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
Ctrl Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
Ctrl Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
Ctrl Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
ENTER
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
ALPHA ALT 8
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
ALPHA Ctrl 7 7 7 7
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Blue F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHIFT F1 - F4
KeyBar
MX9 62-Key Keypad
Alternative keypresses may be defined for F1 through F40. Refer to Optional F1 - F40 Key Maps (page 9-11).
5250 Function
Press these keys in this order
RFTerm GUI Equivalent
Attn
CTL A
Display > SmartPad > Attn
Backtab
Char Backspace
Clear
Delete
SHFT Tab
Orange Tab
Display > SmartPad > BTb
BS
Display > SmartPad > BSp
CTL C
Display > SmartPad > Clr
CTL D
Orange BS
Display > SmartPad > Del
Dup
CTL U
Display > SmartPad > Dup
Erase Input
CTL BS
Display > SmartPad > EIn
Error Reset or Reset
ESC
Display > SmartPad > Rst
Exit Program
ALT X
CTL SHFT X
File > Exit
Function Key Editor
Not Supported
Fastback
Not Supported
Fastfwd
Not Supported
Field Exit
CTL ENTER
Display > SmartPad > FEx
Field Minus
CTL M
Display > SmartPad > F-
Field Plus
CTL L
Display > SmartPad > F+
Help
CTL H
Homekey
Orange SHFT X
Session > Configure > FNKeys
Display > SmartPad > Hm
Insert
CTL I
Display > SmartPad > Ins
New Line Key
CTL N
Display > SmartPad > Nl
Next or Tab
TAB
Display > SmartPad > Tb
Print Screen
CTL ALT P
Display > SmartPad > Prt
SW REV
Not Supported
File > About
Window Down
CTL Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Right
CTL Blue Down Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Left
CTL Blue Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Window Up
CTL Up Arrow
Scroll Bars
Send or Entercatv
ENTER
Display > SmartPad > Ent
Status Line Toggle
ALT T
CTL SHFT O
File > Settings > Display > Hide OIA
Sys_Req
CTL Blue S
Display > SmartPad > Srq
F1 - F10
F1 - F10
KeyBar
F11 - F20
Blue F1 - F10
KeyBar
F21 - F24
SHFT F1 - F4
KeyBar
9 - 89
VX6 and VX7 Key Maps
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
VX6 60-key Keyboard
The VX6 integrated keyboard functions the same as the external 60-key keyboard See 60-Key Keyboard (page 9-44) for
RFTerm keymaps for this keyboard.
VX7 External 60-Key Keyboard
The VX7 supports the external 60-key keyboard. See 60-Key Keyboard (page 9-44) for RFTerm keymaps for this optional
keyboard.
VX7 External 95-Key Keyboard
The VX7 supports the external 95-key keyboard. See 95-Key Keyboard (page 9-40) for RFTerm keymaps for this optional
keyboard.
Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 Key Maps
Note: All RFTerm shortcut keys are directly accessible through the RFTerm user interface.
Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 External 60-Key Keyboard
The Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 support the external 60-key keyboard. See 60-Key Keyboard (page 9-44) for RFTerm keymaps for this optional keyboard.
Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 External 95-Key Keyboard
The Thor VX8 and Thor VX9 support the external 60-key keyboard. See 95-Key Keyboard (page 9-40) for RFTerm keymaps for this optional keyboard.
9 - 90
10
Customer Support
Product Service and Repair
Honeywell International Inc. provides service for all of its products through service centers throughout the world. To obtain warranty or non-warranty service, please visit www.honeywellaidc.com and select Support > Contact Service and Repair to see
your region’s instructions on how to obtain a Return Material Authorization number (RMA #). You should do this prior to returning the product.
Technical Assistance
If you need assistance installing or troubleshooting your device, please contact us by using one of the methods below:
Knowledge Base: www.hsmknowledgebase.com
Our Knowledge Base provides thousands of immediate solutions. If the Knowledge Base cannot help, our Technical Support
Portal (see below) provides an easy way to report your problem or ask your question.
Technical Support Portal: www.hsmsupportportal.com
The Technical Support Portal not only allows you to report your problem, but it also provides immediate solutions to your technical issues by searching our Knowledge Base. With the Portal, you can submit and track your questions online and send and
receive attachments.
Web form: www.hsmcontactsupport.com
You can contact our technical support team directly by filling out our online support form. Enter your contact details and the
description of the question/problem.
Telephone: www.honeywellaidc.com/locations
For our latest contact information, please check our website at the link above.
Limited Warranty
Refer to www.honeywellaidc.com/warranty_information for your product’s warranty information.
10 - 1
Honeywell International Inc.
9680 Old Bailes Road
Fort Mill, SC 29707
www.honeywellaidc.com
™
RFTERM-UG Rev D
10/16